1 #LyX 2.1 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
\r
7 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
\r
9 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
\r
10 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
\r
11 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
\r
12 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
\r
13 % the documentation team
\r
14 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
\r
16 \usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle
\r
17 \ifpdf % if pdflatex is used
\r
19 % set fonts for nicer pdf view
\r
20 \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
\r
22 \fi % end if pdflatex is used
\r
24 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
\r
25 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
\r
27 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
\r
28 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
\r
29 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
\r
30 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
\r
32 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
\r
36 % define a short command for \textvisiblespace
\r
37 \newcommand{\spce}{\textvisiblespace}
\r
39 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
\r
40 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
\r
42 % for customized page headers/footers
\r
43 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
\r
44 \usepackage{fancyhdr}
\r
45 % change header rule width
\r
46 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
\r
48 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
\r
49 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
\r
50 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
\r
51 %\let\OrgIndex\index
\r
52 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
\r
54 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
\r
55 \use_default_options false
\r
57 customHeadersFooters
\r
60 \maintain_unincluded_children false
\r
62 \language_package default
\r
64 \fontencoding global
\r
67 \font_typewriter default
\r
69 \font_default_family default
\r
70 \use_non_tex_fonts false
\r
76 \default_output_format default
\r
78 \bibtex_command default
\r
79 \index_command default
\r
83 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
\r
84 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
\r
88 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
\r
89 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
\r
90 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
\r
91 \pdf_breaklinks false
\r
92 \pdf_pdfborder false
\r
93 \pdf_colorlinks true
\r
95 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
\r
96 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
\r
99 \use_package amsmath 1
\r
100 \use_package amssymb 1
\r
101 \use_package cancel 0
\r
102 \use_package esint 1
\r
103 \use_package mathdots 1
\r
104 \use_package mathtools 0
\r
105 \use_package mhchem 1
\r
106 \use_package stackrel 0
\r
107 \use_package stmaryrd 0
\r
108 \use_package undertilde 0
\r
110 \cite_engine_type numerical
\r
111 \biblio_style plain
\r
112 \use_bibtopic false
\r
114 \paperorientation portrait
\r
115 \suppress_date false
\r
116 \justification true
\r
118 \notefontcolor #0000ff
\r
135 \paragraph_separation indent
\r
136 \paragraph_indentation default
\r
137 \quotes_language english
\r
140 \paperpagestyle default
\r
141 \tracking_changes true
\r
142 \output_changes false
\r
143 \html_math_output 0
\r
144 \html_css_as_file 0
\r
145 \html_be_strict true
\r
146 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
\r
147 \author 2090807402 "usti"
\r
152 \begin_layout Title
\r
153 The LyX User's Guide
\r
156 \begin_layout Author
\r
161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
163 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
\r
164 send them to the LyX Documentation mailing list:
\r
165 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
167 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
\r
178 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
182 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
186 \begin_inset Note Note
\r
189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
190 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
\r
191 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
196 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
\r
204 \begin_layout Standard
\r
205 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
\r
206 LatexCommand tableofcontents
\r
213 \begin_layout Chapter
\r
217 \begin_layout Section
\r
221 \begin_layout Standard
\r
222 LyX is a document preparation system.
\r
223 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar \-
\r
224 scripts, publishable books, business
\r
225 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
\r
226 It is unlike most other
\r
227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
234 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
\r
236 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
\r
237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
252 pt type, left justified, 5
\r
253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
261 LyX takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
\r
262 not with mechanics.
\r
265 \begin_layout Standard
\r
266 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
\r
271 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
\r
275 \begin_layout Standard
\r
280 manual describes several things in addition to LyX's philosophy: most important
\r
281 ly, the format of all of the manuals.
\r
282 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
\r
283 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
\r
289 manual describes that, too.
\r
292 \begin_layout Section
\r
296 \begin_layout Standard
\r
297 Like most applications, LyX has the familiar menu bar across the top of
\r
299 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
\r
300 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
\r
304 \begin_layout Standard
\r
305 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
\r
306 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
\r
307 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
\r
309 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
\r
310 only a vertical scrollbar.
\r
311 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
\r
312 The first case is large images.
\r
313 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
\r
314 image and use the option
\r
320 LaTeX and LyX options
\r
323 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
\r
325 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
\r
326 this doesn't work for equations yet.
\r
329 \begin_layout Standard
\r
330 For a brief description of all LyX menus and toolbar buttons, have a look
\r
332 \begin_inset space ~
\r
336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
338 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
\r
345 \begin_layout Section
\r
349 \begin_layout Standard
\r
350 The help system consists of the LyX manuals.
\r
351 You can read all of the manuals from inside LyX.
\r
352 Just select the manual you want to read from the
\r
359 \begin_layout Section
\r
361 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
363 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
\r
370 \begin_layout Standard
\r
371 Almost all features of LyX can be configured via the menu
\r
373 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
377 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
386 LyX is able to inspect your system to see what programs, LaTeX document
\r
387 classes and LaTeX packages are available.
\r
388 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
\r
390 Although this configuration has already been done when LyX was installed
\r
391 on your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
\r
392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
396 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
399 new LaTeX classes, and which are not seen by LyX.
\r
400 To force LyX to re-inspect your system, you should use
\r
402 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
406 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
410 Reconfiguration of LyX
\r
415 You should then restart LyX to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
\r
418 \begin_layout Section
\r
420 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
422 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
\r
429 \begin_layout Standard
\r
430 You can edit documents in LyX without having LaTeX installed, but you will
\r
431 not be able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it
\r
433 However, some LyX documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
\r
434 PDFs and the like, and every LyX document can always be output as plain
\r
438 \begin_layout Standard
\r
439 Some document classes may depend upon specific LaTeX or DocBook classes
\r
441 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
\r
442 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
\r
445 \begin_layout Standard
\r
446 The LaTeX packages that LyX has found on your system are listed in a file
\r
447 you can view from the menu
\r
449 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
462 \begin_inset space ~
\r
468 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
\r
469 reconfigure LyX (menu
\r
471 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
475 \begin_inset Note Note
\r
478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
479 The two braces in the TeX Code box prevent that the term
\r
480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
487 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
\r
488 More about TeX Code is described in section
\r
489 \begin_inset space ~
\r
493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
495 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
\r
499 , the printout of proper names like LaTeX is explained in section
\r
500 \begin_inset space ~
\r
504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
506 reference "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
\r
516 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
520 Reconfiguration of LyX
\r
525 See section 5.1 of the
\r
529 manual for more information on installing additional LaTeX packages.
\r
532 \begin_layout Chapter
\r
533 How to work with LyX
\r
536 \begin_layout Section
\r
537 Basic File Operations
\r
538 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
550 \begin_layout Standard
\r
555 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
\r
556 in addition to some more advanced operations:
\r
559 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
571 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
575 \begin_inset space ~
\r
579 \begin_inset space ~
\r
585 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
597 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
603 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
615 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
619 \begin_inset space ~
\r
625 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
629 \begin_inset space ~
\r
633 \begin_inset space ~
\r
639 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
643 \begin_inset space ~
\r
649 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
655 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
661 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
667 arg "dialog-show print"
\r
673 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
679 \begin_layout Standard
\r
680 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
\r
681 a few minor differences.
\r
684 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
686 \begin_inset space ~
\r
690 \begin_inset space ~
\r
695 command lists the available templates.
\r
696 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
\r
697 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
\r
698 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
\r
700 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
704 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
706 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
\r
713 \begin_layout Standard
\r
714 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
746 Unless you tell LyX to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank
\r
747 space is just that — a big, blank space.
\r
755 \begin_layout Standard
\r
759 \begin_inset space ~
\r
763 \begin_inset space ~
\r
771 \begin_inset space ~
\r
776 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
\r
780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
781 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
\r
783 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar \@.
\r
792 \begin_inset space ~
\r
796 \begin_inset space ~
\r
801 will reload the document from disk.
\r
802 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
\r
803 and want to restore it to the last save.
\r
807 \begin_inset space ~
\r
812 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
\r
813 them as your changes.
\r
816 \begin_layout Section
\r
817 Basic Editing Features
\r
818 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
828 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
830 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
\r
837 \begin_layout Standard
\r
838 Like most modern word processors, LyX can perform cut and paste operations
\r
839 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
\r
840 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
\r
841 The next four sections cover the basic LyX editing features and how to
\r
843 We will start with cut and paste.
\r
846 \begin_layout Standard
\r
847 As you might expect, the
\r
851 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
\r
852 various other editing features.
\r
853 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
\r
854 The basic ones are:
\r
857 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
871 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
885 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
899 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
903 \begin_inset space ~
\r
909 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
913 \begin_inset space ~
\r
919 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
923 \begin_inset space ~
\r
927 \begin_inset space ~
\r
935 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
\r
941 \begin_layout Standard
\r
942 The first three are self-explanatory.
\r
944 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
953 You can also copy text between LyX and other programs by cut, copy and paste.
\r
957 \begin_inset space ~
\r
962 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
\r
965 \begin_layout Standard
\r
968 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
970 \begin_inset space ~
\r
973 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
975 \begin_inset space ~
\r
979 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
983 \begin_inset space ~
\r
988 will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
\r
990 A new paragraph is started when there is a blank line in the file.
\r
994 \begin_inset space ~
\r
999 , the text is inserted as Paragraphs, where the line breaks of the text
\r
1000 will start a new paragraph.
\r
1003 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1004 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
1007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1014 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
1017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1025 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
1027 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1031 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1039 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1043 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1049 Once you have found a word or expression, LyX selects it.
\r
1054 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
\r
1057 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1063 You can click the
\r
1066 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1071 button to skip the current word.
\r
1075 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1080 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
\r
1084 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1089 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
\r
1091 If the toggle is set, searching for
\r
1092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
1096 \family typewriter
\r
1100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
1103 will not match the word
\r
1104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
1108 \family typewriter
\r
1112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
1118 Match whole words only
\r
1120 option can be used to force LyX to only find complete words, e.
\r
1121 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
1124 g., searching for
\r
1125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
1129 \family typewriter
\r
1133 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
1137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
1141 \family typewriter
\r
1145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
1149 LyX offers also an advanced
\r
1152 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1156 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1161 feature that is described in sec.
\r
1162 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
1166 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
1168 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
\r
1175 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1176 Things like notes, floats, etc.
\r
1177 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
1181 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
1185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
1188 ) can be dissolved.
\r
1189 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
\r
1191 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
\r
1192 inset and pressing
\r
1196 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
\r
1203 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1204 The content of an inset is selected using the shortcut
\r
1207 arg "inset-select-all"
\r
1213 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
\r
1216 selects the whole document.
\r
1219 \begin_layout Section
\r
1221 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
1224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1231 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
1234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1241 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
1242 LatexCommand label
\r
1243 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
\r
1250 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1251 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
\r
1252 LyX has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
\r
1255 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
1258 or the toolbar button
\r
1264 to undo some mistake.
\r
1265 If you accidentally undo too much, use
\r
1267 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
1270 or the toolbar button
\r
1277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
1281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
1284 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
\r
1285 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
1288 steps to minimize memory overhead.
\r
1291 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1292 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
\r
1293 was last saved, the
\r
1294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
1298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
1301 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
\r
1302 This is a consequence of the 100
\r
1303 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
1306 step undo limit mentioned above.
\r
1309 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1318 work on almost everything in LyX.
\r
1319 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
\r
1323 \begin_layout Section
\r
1325 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
1328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1337 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1338 These are the most basic mouse operations.
\r
1341 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
1346 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
1351 once anywhere in the edit window.
\r
1352 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
\r
1356 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
1361 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
1366 and drag the mouse.
\r
1367 LyX marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
\r
1370 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
1373 to create a copy of the text in LyX's buffer (and the clipboard).
\r
1376 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
1377 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into LyX using
\r
1379 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
1386 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
1387 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
\r
1391 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1392 Right-click on them to set their properties.
\r
1393 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
\r
1397 \begin_layout Section
\r
1399 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
1400 LatexCommand label
\r
1401 name "sec:Navigating"
\r
1406 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
1409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1418 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1419 LyX offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
\r
1422 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
1427 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
\r
1428 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
\r
1431 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
1432 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
\r
1434 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
1437 or by the toolbar button
\r
1440 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
\r
1446 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
1447 You can set bookmarks in your document under
\r
1449 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
1452 and use the same menu to return to them.
\r
1453 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
\r
1456 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1457 The toolbar button
\r
1460 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
\r
1465 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
1466 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
1468 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1473 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
\r
1474 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
\r
1475 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
\r
1476 your last editing position.
\r
1479 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1484 key the cursor will be vertically centered in LyX's main window.
\r
1487 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
1489 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
1490 LatexCommand label
\r
1491 name "sub:The-Outliner"
\r
1498 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1499 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
\r
1500 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
\r
1501 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
\r
1503 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
1507 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
1509 reference "sec:Cross-References"
\r
1513 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
\r
1514 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
1518 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
1520 reference "sec:Bibliography"
\r
1525 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
\r
1529 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1530 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
\r
1531 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
\r
1532 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
\r
1533 dialog and to modify the citation.
\r
1536 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1537 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
\r
1539 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
\r
1540 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
\r
1541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
1545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
1548 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
\r
1551 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1552 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
\r
1553 you further to control the display.
\r
1558 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
\r
1559 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
\r
1565 option keeps it in the current view state.
\r
1566 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
\r
1567 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1570 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
\r
1571 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1574 3, the subsections of sections
\r
1575 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1578 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
\r
1583 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
\r
1584 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1588 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
\r
1590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
1594 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
1598 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
\r
1601 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1603 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
1607 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
1608 filename ../images/reload.png
\r
1613 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1616 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
\r
1617 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
\r
1620 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
1624 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
1625 filename ../images/down.png
\r
1627 groupId toolbarbuttons
\r
1632 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1636 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
1640 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
1641 filename ../images/up.png
\r
1643 groupId toolbarbuttons
\r
1648 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1651 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
\r
1652 So, for example, you can move section
\r
1653 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1656 2.5 before section
\r
1657 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1660 2.4 or after section
\r
1661 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1665 LyX will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
\r
1667 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
1668 filename ../images/promote.png
\r
1670 groupId toolbarbuttons
\r
1675 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
1676 filename ../images/demote.png
\r
1678 groupId toolbarbuttons
\r
1682 (or the corresponding key bindings
\r
1690 ) you can change the level of sections.
\r
1691 So you can for example make section
\r
1692 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1696 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1700 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1706 \begin_layout Section
\r
1707 Input/Word Completion
\r
1708 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
1709 LatexCommand label
\r
1710 name "sec:Input-Completion"
\r
1715 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
1718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1725 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
1728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1729 Word completion|see
\r
1733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1759 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1760 LyX provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
\r
1762 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
\r
1763 is used to propose completions.
\r
1766 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1767 Input completion can be activated in the LyX preferences (menu
\r
1769 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
1774 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
1781 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1785 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1790 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
\r
1794 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1799 the completions are always shown in a popup.
\r
1800 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
\r
1804 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1810 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
\r
1811 popup completion and choose if long completions should be abbreviated.
\r
1814 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1815 LyX displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there
\r
1816 are completions available.
\r
1821 key to accept a proposed completion.
\r
1822 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
\r
1823 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
\r
1824 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
\r
1831 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1832 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
\r
1833 ing options for text.
\r
1834 The special math option
\r
1838 enables characters to be composed.
\r
1839 If, for example, you want to insert the character
\r
1840 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
\r
1843 , you can then input the characters
\r
1844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
1852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
1855 to a formula to get it.
\r
1856 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
\r
1857 of the math toolbar.
\r
1858 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
\r
1859 \family typewriter
\r
1862 that is in LyX's installation folder.
\r
1863 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
\r
1872 \begin_layout Section
\r
1873 Basic Key Bindings
\r
1874 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
1877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1884 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
1887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1916 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
1919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1950 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1951 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
\r
1952 \family typewriter
\r
1956 \family typewriter
\r
1961 \family typewriter
\r
1964 , which can be changed in the LyX preferences under
\r
1966 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
1970 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
\r
1971 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
1975 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
1977 reference "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
\r
1984 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1988 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1996 \begin_inset space ~
\r
2017 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
\r
2021 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
2022 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
2026 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
\r
2027 LatexCommand nomenclature
\r
2029 description "Tabulator key"
\r
2035 There is no such thing as a tab stop in LyX.
\r
2036 If you do not understand this, go read sections
\r
2037 \begin_inset space ~
\r
2041 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
2043 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
\r
2048 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
2050 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
\r
2054 , especially section
\r
2055 \begin_inset space ~
\r
2059 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
2061 reference "sub:Lists"
\r
2067 If you are still confused, look in the
\r
2072 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
2079 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
\r
2080 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
\r
2084 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
2085 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
2089 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
\r
2090 LatexCommand nomenclature
\r
2092 description "Escape key"
\r
2099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
2103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
2106 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
\r
2107 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
\r
2110 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
2111 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
2117 \begin_inset space ~
\r
2121 \begin_inset space ~
\r
2128 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
\r
2129 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
\r
2130 or end of the file.
\r
2133 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2134 There are three modifier keys:
\r
2137 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
2138 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
2144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
2152 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
2156 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
\r
2157 LatexCommand nomenclature
\r
2159 description "Control key"
\r
2163 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
\r
2164 on which keys it is used in combination with:
\r
2168 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
2177 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
\r
2180 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
2189 , it moves by words instead of characters.
\r
2192 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
2201 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
\r
2205 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
2206 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
2212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
2220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
2224 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
\r
2225 LatexCommand nomenclature
\r
2227 description "Shift key"
\r
2231 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
\r
2232 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
\r
2235 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
2236 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
2242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
2250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
2254 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
\r
2255 LatexCommand nomenclature
\r
2257 description "Alt or Meta key"
\r
2261 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
\r
2262 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
\r
2263 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
\r
2269 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
2272 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
\r
2274 menu accelerator keys
\r
2277 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
\r
2278 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
\r
2282 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2283 For example, the sequence
\r
2284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
2290 \begin_inset space ~
\r
2294 \begin_inset space ~
\r
2300 \begin_inset space ~
\r
2308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
2312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
2316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
2321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
2327 \begin_inset space ~
\r
2333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
2343 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2348 manual lists all other things bound to the
\r
2356 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2357 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
\r
2358 LyX, because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar
\r
2359 at the bottom of LyX's main window which describes the name of the action
\r
2360 you have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
\r
2361 The LyX menus also list the defined key bindings.
\r
2362 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
\r
2363 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
\r
2365 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
\r
2366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
2374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
2381 followed by a capital
\r
2388 \begin_layout Chapter
\r
2390 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
2393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
2402 \begin_layout Section
\r
2404 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
2407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
2416 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
2420 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2421 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
\r
2422 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
\r
2423 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
\r
2424 numbering schemes, and so on.
\r
2425 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
\r
2426 and format the title of your document differently.
\r
2429 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2434 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
\r
2435 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
\r
2436 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
\r
2437 If you don't choose a document class, LyX picks one for you by default.
\r
2438 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
\r
2441 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
2443 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
2446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
2447 Document ! Classes
\r
2453 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
2454 LatexCommand label
\r
2455 name "sec:Document-Classes"
\r
2462 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2463 You can select a class using the
\r
2465 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
2466 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
2470 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
2473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
2474 Document ! Settings
\r
2480 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
\r
2484 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
2488 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2489 There are four standard document classes in LyX.
\r
2493 \begin_layout Description
\r
2494 Article for basic articles
\r
2497 \begin_layout Description
\r
2498 Report for basic reports
\r
2501 \begin_layout Description
\r
2502 Book for writing a book
\r
2505 \begin_layout Description
\r
2506 Letter for US-style letters
\r
2509 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2510 There are also some non-standard classes, which LyX only uses if you have
\r
2511 installed the corresponding LaTeX class files, though most LaTeX distributions
\r
2512 will include many of these.
\r
2513 Here are some of the classes.
\r
2514 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
\r
2516 Special Document Classes
\r
2520 Additional Features
\r
2525 \begin_layout Description
\r
2526 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
\r
2529 \begin_layout Description
\r
2530 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
\r
2534 \begin_layout Description
\r
2535 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
\r
2539 \begin_layout Description
\r
2540 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
\r
2541 Mathematical Society (AMS).
\r
2542 There are three article layouts available.
\r
2543 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
\r
2544 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
\r
2545 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
\r
2546 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
\r
2548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
2551 sequential numbering
\r
2552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
2555 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
\r
2556 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
\r
2557 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
\r
2558 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
\r
2561 \begin_layout Description
\r
2562 Beamer Layout for presentations
\r
2565 \begin_layout Description
\r
2566 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
\r
2567 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
\r
2571 \begin_layout Description
\r
2572 Chess Layout to write about chess games
\r
2575 \begin_layout Description
\r
2577 \begin_inset space ~
\r
2580 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
\r
2583 \begin_layout Description
\r
2584 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
\r
2587 \begin_layout Description
\r
2588 Foils Used to make transparencies
\r
2591 \begin_layout Description
\r
2592 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
\r
2593 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
\r
2597 \begin_layout Description
\r
2598 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
\r
2599 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
\r
2602 \begin_layout Description
\r
2603 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
\r
2606 \begin_layout Description
\r
2607 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
\r
2610 \begin_layout Description
\r
2611 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
\r
2612 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
\r
2613 (Is used by this document.)
\r
2616 \begin_layout Description
\r
2617 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
\r
2620 \begin_layout Description
\r
2621 Powerdot Layout for presentations
\r
2624 \begin_layout Description
\r
2629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
2636 X is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
\r
2637 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
\r
2639 This class is not completely compatible with all LyX features.
\r
2642 \begin_layout Description
\r
2643 Slides Used to make transparencies
\r
2646 \begin_layout Description
\r
2648 \begin_inset space ~
\r
2651 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
\r
2652 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
\r
2655 \begin_layout Description
\r
2656 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
\r
2659 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2660 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
\r
2662 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
\r
2665 Additional Features
\r
2668 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
\r
2669 of the document classes.
\r
2672 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
2676 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2677 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
\r
2679 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
2680 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
2682 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
2685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
2686 Document ! Settings
\r
2694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
2698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
2702 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
\r
2703 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
\r
2705 So it may seem that something is wrong.
\r
2708 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2710 LyX includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
\r
2711 and some of them, like
\r
2715 , are highly specialized.
\r
2716 LyX tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
\r
2717 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing
\r
2719 No LaTeX distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
\r
2720 by some document class.
\r
2721 There are just too many of them.
\r
2722 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
\r
2725 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2726 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
\r
2727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
2731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
2734 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
\r
2735 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
\r
2736 document class for a new file.
\r
2737 LyX will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
\r
2739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
2742 Installing new LaTeX files
\r
2743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
2750 manual for information on how to install them.
\r
2751 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
\r
2757 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2758 Although LyX provides support for many different sorts of documents, it
\r
2759 does not include support for every document class people might want to
\r
2761 For example, many universities provide LaTeX class files to be used for
\r
2762 dissertations submitted to those universities.
\r
2763 The LyX team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
\r
2764 There are too many.
\r
2765 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
\r
2769 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
\r
2775 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
\r
2778 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
2780 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
2781 LatexCommand label
\r
2782 name "sub:Modules"
\r
2787 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
2790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
2791 Document ! Modules
\r
2799 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2800 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
\r
2801 chosen document class.
\r
2802 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
\r
2803 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
\r
2804 ing module in the
\r
2810 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
2814 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
2817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
2818 Document ! Settings
\r
2824 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
\r
2828 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2829 Some modules require LaTeX packages or file format converters that are not
\r
2830 always installed by default.
\r
2831 LyX will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
\r
2832 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
\r
2833 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
\r
2834 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since LyX will not be
\r
2835 able to compile the LaTeX file without the missing prerequisites.
\r
2836 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
\r
2837 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure LyX by selecting
\r
2840 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
2844 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
2847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
2848 Reconfiguration of LyX
\r
2854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
2857 Installing new LaTeX files
\r
2858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
2865 manual for more information on installing required packages.
\r
2868 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2869 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
2872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
2877 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
\r
2878 LyX will advise you about these things.
\r
2886 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
2888 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
2889 LatexCommand label
\r
2890 name "sub:Local-Layout"
\r
2895 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
2898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
2899 Document ! Local Layout
\r
2907 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2908 Modules are to LyX much as packages are to LaTeX: They are intended to be
\r
2909 used in a variety of different documents.
\r
2910 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
\r
2911 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
\r
2912 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
\r
2913 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
\r
2914 You want something that is like a document's own LaTeX preamble.
\r
2915 What you want is LyX's
\r
2916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
2920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
2932 manual for information on how to use it.
\r
2935 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
2939 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2940 Each class has a default set of options.
\r
2941 Here's a quick table describing them:
\r
2944 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2945 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
\r
2951 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2953 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
2954 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
\r
2955 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
2956 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
2957 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
2958 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
2959 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
2960 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
2962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
2965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
2971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
2974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
2989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
2992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3414 \begin_layout Standard
\r
3415 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
\r
3421 \begin_layout Standard
\r
3422 You're probably also wondering what
\r
3423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
3427 \begin_inset space ~
\r
3431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
3435 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
\r
3436 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
\r
3441 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
\r
3446 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
\r
3456 headings, there are also
\r
3464 headings, and so on.
\r
3465 We will describe these headings fully in section
\r
3466 \begin_inset space ~
\r
3470 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
3472 reference "sub:Headings"
\r
3479 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
3481 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
3482 LatexCommand label
\r
3483 name "sub:Document-Layout"
\r
3488 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
3491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3500 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
3503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3504 Document ! Settings
\r
3512 \begin_layout Standard
\r
3513 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
\r
3515 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
3522 \begin_inset space ~
\r
3530 \begin_inset space ~
\r
3535 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
\r
3537 This is only necessary if LyX doesn't support special options you want
\r
3538 to use for your document.
\r
3539 To learn more about your favorite LaTeX-class and its options, you have
\r
3540 to read its manual.
\r
3543 \begin_layout Standard
\r
3547 \begin_inset space ~
\r
3554 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
3560 \begin_inset space ~
\r
3565 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
\r
3566 You can choose between the following five options:
\r
3569 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
3570 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
3575 Use default page style of current class.
\r
3578 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
3579 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
3584 No page numbers or headings.
\r
3587 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
3588 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
3593 Page numbers only.
\r
3596 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
3597 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
3602 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
\r
3603 Whether LyX uses the current chapter or the current section depends on
\r
3604 the maximum sectioning level of the class.
\r
3607 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
3608 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
3613 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
\r
3614 have the LaTeX-package
\r
3619 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
3622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3623 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
\r
3629 How they are defined is explained in section
\r
3630 \begin_inset space ~
\r
3634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
3636 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
\r
3643 \begin_layout Standard
\r
3644 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
\r
3645 \begin_inset space ~
\r
3649 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
3651 reference "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
\r
3658 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
3659 Paper Size and Orientation
\r
3660 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
3663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3664 Document ! Paper size
\r
3670 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
3671 LatexCommand label
\r
3672 name "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
\r
3679 \begin_layout Standard
\r
3680 You can find the following options in the menu
\r
3683 \begin_inset space ~
\r
3690 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
3696 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
3699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3700 Document ! Settings
\r
3708 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
3709 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
3713 \begin_inset space ~
\r
3718 What size paper to print on.
\r
3723 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
3729 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
3735 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
3741 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
3747 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
3750 US letter, US legal, US executive
\r
3753 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
3759 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
3766 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
3767 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
3772 To choose whether to output as
\r
3783 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
3784 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
3788 \begin_inset space ~
\r
3793 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
\r
3794 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
\r
3797 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
3799 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
3800 LatexCommand label
\r
3801 name "sub:Margins"
\r
3806 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
3809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3810 Document ! Margins
\r
3816 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
3819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3828 \begin_layout Standard
\r
3829 Paper margins are set in the menu
\r
3831 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
3835 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
3838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3839 Document ! Settings
\r
3847 \begin_layout Standard
\r
3848 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
\r
3849 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
\r
3850 the paper format and the font size into account.
\r
3853 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
3857 \begin_layout Standard
\r
3858 If you change a document class, LyX has to convert
\r
3862 into the new class.
\r
3863 That includes the paragraph environments.
\r
3864 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
\r
3865 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
\r
3866 If this is the case, and you change the document class, LyX will mark the
\r
3867 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
\r
3868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
3872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
3876 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
\r
3878 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
\r
3879 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
\r
3880 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
\r
3883 \begin_layout Section
\r
3884 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
\r
3885 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
3888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3889 Paragraph ! Indentation
\r
3897 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
3899 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
3900 LatexCommand label
\r
3901 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
\r
3908 \begin_layout Standard
\r
3909 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
\r
3910 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
\r
3913 \begin_layout Standard
\r
3914 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
\r
3915 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
\r
3916 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
\r
3917 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
\r
3921 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
\r
3927 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
\r
3928 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
\r
3929 language than English.
\r
3930 LaTeX takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language
\r
3934 \begin_layout Standard
\r
3935 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
\r
3936 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
\r
3938 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
\r
3939 LyX takes care of that.
\r
3940 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
\r
3942 That way, LyX can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure
\r
3943 figures fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom
\r
3944 of a page, and so on.
\r
3948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3949 LaTeX does this when LyX goes to produce a printable file.
\r
3954 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
\r
3955 LyX gives you the ability globally to change
\r
3959 these pre-coded spacings.
\r
3960 We will explain more later.
\r
3963 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
3964 Paragraph Separation
\r
3965 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
3966 LatexCommand label
\r
3967 name "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
\r
3972 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
3975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3976 Paragraph ! Separation
\r
3984 \begin_layout Standard
\r
3992 \begin_inset space ~
\r
4000 \begin_inset space ~
\r
4007 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
4011 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
4014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
4015 Document ! Settings
\r
4020 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
\r
4023 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
4027 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4028 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
\r
4031 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
4033 \begin_inset space ~
\r
4038 dialog and toggle the
\r
4041 \begin_inset space ~
\r
4046 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
\r
4049 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
\r
4053 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
\r
4054 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
\r
4058 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4059 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
\r
4060 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
\r
4063 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
4065 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
4068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
4069 Paragraph ! Line spacing
\r
4077 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4080 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
4084 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
4087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
4088 Document ! Settings
\r
4096 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
\r
4100 \begin_inset space ~
\r
4109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
4110 You need to have the LaTeX-package
\r
4115 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
4118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
4119 LaTeX-packages ! setspace
\r
4124 installed to use this feature.
\r
4129 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
\r
4131 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
4133 \begin_inset space ~
\r
4138 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
\r
4139 is normally defined in the environment's style.
\r
4142 \begin_layout Section
\r
4143 Paragraph Environments
\r
4144 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
4145 LatexCommand label
\r
4146 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
\r
4151 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
4154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
4155 Paragraph ! Environments
\r
4161 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
4164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
4165 Paragraph environments|(
\r
4173 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
4177 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4178 Paragraph environments correspond to the
\r
4181 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4200 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
4203 command sequence in LaTeX files.
\r
4204 If you don't know LaTeX, or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
\r
4205 alien to you, we urge you to read the
\r
4214 also contains many more examples than this section does.
\r
4217 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4218 A paragraph environment is simply a
\r
4219 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
4223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
4226 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
\r
4227 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
\r
4228 scheme, labels, and so on.
\r
4229 Additionally, you can
\r
4230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
4234 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
4237 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
\r
4238 to inherit some of the properties of another.
\r
4239 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
\r
4240 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
\r
4242 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
\r
4244 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
\r
4247 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4248 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
\r
4249 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
4250 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
\r
4256 at the left end of the toolbar.
\r
4257 LyX will change the environment of the
\r
4261 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
\r
4262 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
\r
4263 you select them before choosing the new environment.
\r
4267 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4268 Note that entering
\r
4276 create a new paragraph using the
\r
4280 paragraph environment.
\r
4282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
4286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
4289 because if you are in one of these environments:
\r
4292 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4298 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4304 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4310 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4316 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4322 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4328 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4334 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4335 LyX keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
\r
4339 , rather than resetting it to
\r
4344 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
\r
4345 \begin_inset space ~
\r
4349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
4351 reference "sec:Nesting"
\r
4358 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
4362 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4363 The default paragraph environment is
\r
4368 It creates a plain paragraph.
\r
4369 If LyX resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
\r
4370 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
\r
4371 this manual) are in the
\r
4378 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4379 You can nest a paragraph using the
\r
4383 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
\r
4391 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
4393 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
4396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
4405 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4406 A LaTeX title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the
\r
4408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
4412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
4415 for thanks or contact information.
\r
4416 For certain types of documents, LaTeX places all of this on a separate
\r
4417 page along with today's date.
\r
4418 For other types of documents, the title
\r
4419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
4423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
4426 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
\r
4430 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4431 LyX provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
\r
4445 Here's how you use them:
\r
4448 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4449 Put the title of your document in the
\r
4456 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4457 Put the author name in the
\r
4464 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4465 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
\r
4466 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
\r
4472 Note that using this environment is optional.
\r
4473 If you don't provide any, LaTeX will automatically insert today's date.
\r
4474 If you don't want a date, use the option
\r
4476 Suppress default date on front page
\r
4480 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
4481 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
4483 \begin_inset space ~
\r
4491 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4492 You can use footnotes to insert
\r
4493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
4497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
4500 or contact information.
\r
4503 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
4505 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
4508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
4515 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
4516 LatexCommand label
\r
4517 name "sub:Headings"
\r
4524 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4525 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
\r
4526 LyX takes care of the numbering for you.
\r
4529 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
4531 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
4534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
4535 Section headings ! Numbered
\r
4543 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4544 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
\r
4548 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
4554 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
4560 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
4566 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
4572 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
4578 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
4584 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
4590 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4591 LyX labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
\r
4592 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
\r
4593 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
\r
4596 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4597 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
\r
4598 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
\r
4599 You group the book into chapters.
\r
4600 LyX does a similar grouping:
\r
4603 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4608 is divided into either
\r
4619 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4624 s are divided into
\r
4631 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4636 s are divided into
\r
4643 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4648 s are divided into
\r
4655 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4660 s are divided into
\r
4667 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4672 s are divided into
\r
4679 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4680 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
4683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
4688 Not all document types use the
\r
4692 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
\r
4697 is the top-level heading.
\r
4705 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4706 So, if you use the
\r
4710 environment to label a new sub-subsection, LyX labels it with its number,
\r
4711 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
\r
4713 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
\r
4715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
4719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
4725 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
4726 Unnumbered Headings
\r
4727 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
4730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
4731 Section headings ! Unnumbered
\r
4739 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4740 The unnumbered section headings have a
\r
4741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
4745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
4748 at the end of their name.
\r
4749 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
\r
4750 the table of contents, see section
\r
4751 \begin_inset space ~
\r
4755 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
4757 reference "sec:toc"
\r
4764 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
4765 Changing the Numbering
\r
4766 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
4767 LatexCommand label
\r
4768 name "sub:Numbering-depth"
\r
4775 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4776 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
\r
4777 in the Table of Contents.
\r
4778 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
\r
4780 Just as certain classes start with
\r
4784 and go down to the
\r
4794 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
\r
4795 Most don't number
\r
4804 This is something you can change.
\r
4807 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4810 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
4814 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
4817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
4818 Document ! Settings
\r
4826 \begin_inset space ~
\r
4830 \begin_inset space ~
\r
4835 you will see two counters.
\r
4840 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy LyX numbers a section
\r
4842 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
\r
4846 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
4847 Short Titles of Headings
\r
4848 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
4851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
4852 Section headings ! Short titles
\r
4858 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
4861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
4868 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
4869 LatexCommand label
\r
4870 name "sec:Short-Titles"
\r
4877 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4878 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
\r
4879 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
\r
4880 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
\r
4881 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
\r
4884 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4885 LaTeX allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
\r
4886 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
\r
4887 avoiding the problem mentioned.
\r
4888 To specify a short title, use the menu
\r
4890 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
4892 \begin_inset space ~
\r
4898 This will insert a box labeled
\r
4899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
4903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
4907 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
4911 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
4914 ) which you can use to enter the short title text.
\r
4915 This also works for captions inside floats.
\r
4918 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4919 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
\r
4922 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
4923 Special Information
\r
4926 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4927 The following information applies to all section headings:
\r
4930 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4931 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
\r
4934 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4935 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
\r
4938 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4939 You can only use inline math in these environments.
\r
4942 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4943 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
\r
4946 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
4947 Quotes and Poetry line spacing
\r
4950 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4951 LyX has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
\r
4965 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
\r
4966 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
\r
4967 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
\r
4968 the text they contain.
\r
4969 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
\r
4977 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
\r
4980 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4981 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
\r
4990 when you start a new paragraph.
\r
4991 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
\r
4995 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
\r
4996 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
\r
4997 have to change back to the
\r
5001 environment yourself.
\r
5004 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
5014 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
5015 LatexCommand label
\r
5021 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
5024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
5033 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5034 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
\r
5035 time for the differences.
\r
5044 are identical except for one difference:
\r
5048 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
\r
5057 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
\r
5060 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5061 Here's an example of the
\r
5068 \begin_layout Quote
\r
5074 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
\r
5076 See – no indentation!
\r
5079 \begin_layout Quote
\r
5080 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
\r
5081 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
\r
5082 the other paragraph.
\r
5085 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5086 Here's another example, this time in the
\r
5093 \begin_layout Quotation
\r
5099 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
\r
5100 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
\r
5101 the first line, then
\r
5105 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
\r
5109 you were quoting other text.
\r
5112 \begin_layout Quotation
\r
5113 Here's a new paragraph.
\r
5114 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
\r
5115 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
\r
5118 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5119 As the examples show,
\r
5123 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
\r
5124 They should put quotes in the
\r
5129 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
\r
5133 paragraph environment for quoted text.
\r
5136 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
5142 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
5145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
5154 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
5157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
5164 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
5165 LatexCommand label
\r
5173 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5178 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
\r
5179 Here's an example:
\r
5182 \begin_layout Verse
\r
5184 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
5187 Which I did not rehearse!
\r
5190 \begin_layout Verse
\r
5191 It could be much worse.
\r
5192 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
\r
5194 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
\r
5195 indented a bit more than the first.
\r
5196 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
\r
5200 \begin_layout Verse
\r
5202 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
5205 And make things look fine
\r
5206 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
5212 arg "newline-insert newline"
\r
5218 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5223 does not indent both margins.
\r
5224 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
\r
5225 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the
\r
5226 \family typewriter
\r
5232 arg "newline-insert newline"
\r
5238 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
5240 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
5243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
5250 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
5251 LatexCommand label
\r
5259 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5260 LyX has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
\r
5270 environments, LyX labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
\r
5279 environments, LyX lets you provide your own label.
\r
5280 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
\r
5281 describing some general features of all four of them.
\r
5284 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
5288 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5289 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
\r
5291 First, LyX treats each paragraph as a list item.
\r
5300 reset the environment to
\r
5304 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
\r
5305 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
\r
5306 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
\r
5307 depth, you can use
\r
5310 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
5314 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
\r
5321 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5322 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
\r
5323 In fact, LyX changes the labels on some list items depending on how it
\r
5325 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
\r
5326 you read all of section
\r
5327 \begin_inset space ~
\r
5331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
5333 reference "sec:Nesting"
\r
5340 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
5346 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
5349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
5356 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
5357 LatexCommand label
\r
5358 name "sec:Itemize"
\r
5365 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5366 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
\r
5370 paragraph environment.
\r
5371 It has the following properties:
\r
5374 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
5375 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
\r
5379 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
5380 LyX uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
\r
5383 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
5384 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
\r
5388 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
5389 The items can have any length.
\r
5390 LyX automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
\r
5391 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
\r
5398 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
5403 environment inside another
\r
5407 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
\r
5411 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
5412 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
\r
5415 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
5416 LyX always shows the same symbol on screen.
\r
5419 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
5421 \begin_inset space ~
\r
5425 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
5427 reference "sec:Nesting"
\r
5431 for a full explanation of nesting.
\r
5435 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5436 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
\r
5445 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
\r
5448 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5449 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
\r
5450 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
\r
5453 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
5454 The label for the first level
\r
5458 is a large black dot, or bullet.
\r
5462 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
5463 The label for the second level is a dash.
\r
5467 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
5468 The label for the third is an asterisk.
\r
5472 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
5473 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
\r
5477 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
5478 Back out to the third level.
\r
5482 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
5483 Back to the second level.
\r
5487 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
5488 Back to the outermost level.
\r
5491 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5492 These are the default labels for an
\r
5497 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
\r
5499 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
5502 dialog in the submenu
\r
5507 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
5510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
5511 Document ! Settings
\r
5516 These customizations are not displayed in LyX.
\r
5519 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5520 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
\r
5521 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
\r
5523 \begin_inset space ~
\r
5527 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
5529 reference "sec:Nesting"
\r
5536 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
5542 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
5545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
5552 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
5553 LatexCommand label
\r
5554 name "sec:Enumerate"
\r
5561 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5566 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
\r
5567 It has these properties:
\r
5570 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5571 Each item has a numeral as its label.
\r
5575 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5576 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
\r
5580 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5581 LyX automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
\r
5584 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5589 environment resets the counter to one.
\r
5592 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5605 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5606 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
\r
5607 Items can have any length.
\r
5610 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5611 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
\r
5614 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5615 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
\r
5618 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5619 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
\r
5623 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5632 shows the different labels for each item in LyX.
\r
5633 Here is how LyX labels the four different levels in an
\r
5640 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5641 The first level of an
\r
5645 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
\r
5649 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5650 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
\r
5654 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5655 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
\r
5659 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5660 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
\r
5663 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5664 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
\r
5669 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5670 Back to the third level
\r
5674 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5675 Back to the second level.
\r
5679 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5680 Back to the outermost level.
\r
5683 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5684 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
\r
5688 environment, see section
\r
5689 \begin_inset space ~
\r
5693 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
5695 reference "sub:Customized-Lists"
\r
5700 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in LyX.
\r
5703 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5704 There is more to nesting
\r
5708 environments than we've stated here.
\r
5709 You should read section
\r
5710 \begin_inset space ~
\r
5714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
5716 reference "sec:Nesting"
\r
5720 to learn more about nesting.
\r
5723 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
5729 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
5732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
5733 Lists ! Description
\r
5741 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5742 Unlike the previous two environments, the
\r
5746 list has no fixed label.
\r
5747 Instead, LyX uses the first
\r
5748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
5752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
5755 of the first line as the label.
\r
5756 Here's an example:
\r
5759 \begin_layout Description
\r
5760 Example: This is an example of the
\r
5767 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5768 LyX typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
\r
5772 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
5778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
5781 it is meant that the first usage of the
\r
5785 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
\r
5787 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
\r
5795 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
\r
5800 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
5801 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
5803 \begin_inset space ~
\r
5809 \begin_inset space ~
\r
5813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
5815 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
\r
5819 for more information.) Here is an example:
\r
5822 \begin_layout Description
\r
5824 \begin_inset space ~
\r
5827 Example: This one shows how to use a
\r
5830 \begin_inset space ~
\r
5835 in the label of a
\r
5842 \begin_layout Description
\r
5843 Usage: You should use the
\r
5847 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
\r
5848 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
\r
5849 that describes it.
\r
5850 It's not a good idea to use a
\r
5854 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
\r
5855 You're better off using
\r
5863 and nesting several
\r
5867 paragraphs into them.
\r
5870 \begin_layout Description
\r
5871 Nesting: You can nest
\r
5875 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
\r
5879 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5880 Notice that after the first line, LyX indents subsequent lines, offsetting
\r
5881 them from the first line.
\r
5884 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
5886 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
5889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
5898 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5903 environment is a LyX extension to LaTeX.
\r
5906 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5915 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
\r
5917 Here are its properties:
\r
5920 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
5921 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
5923 \begin_inset space ~
\r
5926 labels LyX uses the first
\r
5927 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
5931 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
5934 of each line as the item label.
\r
5939 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
\r
5940 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
\r
5941 space as described above.
\r
5944 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
5945 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
5946 margins As you can see, LyX uses different margins for the item label and
\r
5947 the body of the item text.
\r
5948 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
\r
5949 label width plus a little extra space.
\r
5953 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
5954 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
5956 \begin_inset space ~
\r
5959 width LyX uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is
\r
5961 If the label width is larger, the label
\r
5962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
5966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
5969 into the first line.
\r
5970 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
\r
5971 margin of the rest of the item text.
\r
5974 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
5975 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
5977 \begin_inset space ~
\r
5980 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
\r
5985 environment has the same left margin.
\r
5986 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
5989 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
\r
5992 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
5994 \begin_inset space ~
\r
5999 dialog (toolbar button
\r
6002 arg "layout-paragraph"
\r
6006 The text in the box
\r
6009 \begin_inset space ~
\r
6014 determines the default label width.
\r
6015 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
\r
6017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
6021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
6024 multiple times instead.
\r
6025 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in LaTeX.
\r
6027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
6031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
6034 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
\r
6037 \begin_inset space ~
\r
6042 every time you alter a label in a
\r
6047 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
6050 The predefined default width is the length of
\r
6051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
6055 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
6059 \begin_inset space ~
\r
6065 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6066 You should use the
\r
6070 list the same way as the
\r
6074 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
\r
6080 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
\r
6084 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6089 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
\r
6090 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
\r
6092 \begin_inset space ~
\r
6096 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
6098 reference "sec:Nesting"
\r
6102 to learn about nesting.
\r
6105 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6106 There is yet another feature of the
\r
6110 list: As you can see in the examples, LyX left-justifies the item labels
\r
6112 You can use additional
\r
6116 to change how LyX justifies the item label.
\r
6121 are documented in section
\r
6122 \begin_inset space ~
\r
6126 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
6128 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
\r
6133 Here are some examples:
\r
6136 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
6137 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
6138 Left The default for
\r
6145 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
6146 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
6147 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
6154 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
\r
6157 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
6158 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
6159 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
6163 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
6170 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
\r
6173 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
6175 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
6176 LatexCommand label
\r
6177 name "sub:Customized-Lists"
\r
6182 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
6185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6186 Lists ! Customized
\r
6194 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6195 The features described in this section require that the module
\r
6197 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
\r
6199 is loaded in the document settings.
\r
6200 The module uses the LaTeX-package
\r
6205 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
6208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6209 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
\r
6217 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
6218 Custom Enumerate Lists
\r
6219 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
6222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6223 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
\r
6231 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6233 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
\r
6236 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
6239 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
\r
6240 There you add the command
\r
6243 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6251 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6252 in TeX Code (shortcut
\r
6262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6263 For more about TeX Code, look at section
\r
6264 \begin_inset space ~
\r
6268 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
6270 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
\r
6283 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
\r
6290 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
\r
6291 For capital Roman numerals replace
\r
6303 in the command above.
\r
6304 For Arabic numerals use
\r
6312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
6316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
6319 items with capital or small Latin letters use
\r
6334 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6336 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
6339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6344 You can only number 26
\r
6345 \begin_inset space ~
\r
6348 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
\r
6356 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6357 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
\r
6358 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
\r
6361 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6362 Here is a list with custom numbering:
\r
6365 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
6366 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
6369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6395 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
6396 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
6399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6422 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
6427 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
6428 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
6431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6455 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
6456 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
6459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6485 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6486 For this list these commands were used:
\r
6489 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6500 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
6508 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
6516 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
6526 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6527 where the command
\r
6533 makes the label emphasized and
\r
6542 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6543 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
6546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6551 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
\r
6552 lists until you change the definition.
\r
6560 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
6561 Resumed Enumeration
\r
6562 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
6565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6566 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
\r
6574 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6575 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
\r
6578 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
6579 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
6582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6601 \begin_inset Note Note
\r
6604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6605 goes back to default numbering
\r
6613 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
6617 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6621 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
\r
6625 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6626 To resume an enumeration, use the style
\r
6631 Its numbering appears in blue within LyX to indicate that it is a resumed
\r
6632 list and that the numbering will not be correct in LyX, but in the output.
\r
6635 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6636 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
6639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6644 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a LaTeX error.
\r
6652 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6653 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
\r
6655 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
\r
6656 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
\r
6657 of a normal enumeration.
\r
6658 There, insert the command
\r
6661 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6667 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6672 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
\r
6676 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
6680 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
6684 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6685 Enumeration starting at a given value:
\r
6688 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
6689 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
6692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6708 This enumeration starts at 4
\r
6711 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
6713 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
6716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6725 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6726 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
\r
6728 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
\r
6731 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
6735 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
6736 with standard spacing
\r
6739 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6740 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
\r
6742 Add there the command
\r
6746 to get no additional list space like in this example:
\r
6749 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
6750 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
6753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6772 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
6773 without additional
\r
6776 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
6780 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6781 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the LaTeX-package
\r
6787 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
6790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6791 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
\r
6797 For more information see its documentation,
\r
6798 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
6807 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6808 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
\r
6810 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
\r
6811 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
\r
6812 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
6815 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
\r
6818 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
6819 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
6822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6830 parindent, labelsep=2cm
\r
6843 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
6844 with negative indentation
\r
6847 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
6848 Further Customization
\r
6849 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
6852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6853 Lists ! Customization
\r
6861 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6862 You can also change the style of description lists.
\r
6866 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6872 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6873 changes the description label font, the command
\r
6876 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6882 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6883 sets the list style.
\r
6886 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6887 An example where the command
\r
6890 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6895 itshape, style=nextline
\r
6898 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6902 \begin_layout Description
\r
6904 \begin_inset space ~
\r
6908 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
6911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6917 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
\r
6919 itshape, style=nextline
\r
6929 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
\r
6930 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
\r
6934 \begin_layout Description
\r
6936 \begin_inset space ~
\r
6939 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
\r
6940 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
\r
6941 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
\r
6944 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6945 There are many more commands and features provided by the LaTeX-package
\r
6951 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
6954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6955 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
\r
6961 For more information see its documentation
\r
6962 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
6971 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
6973 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
6976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6985 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
6993 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7001 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7002 Although LyX has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
\r
7003 environments called
\r
7010 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7016 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
\r
7017 in a specific order, otherwise LaTeX gags on the document.
\r
7018 In contrast, you can use the
\r
7025 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7030 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
\r
7031 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
\r
7035 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7036 Of course, you're not limited to using
\r
7043 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7052 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7057 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
\r
7058 some European academic papers.
\r
7061 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
7063 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
7064 LatexCommand label
\r
7065 name "sec:Address-Usage"
\r
7072 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7077 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
\r
7078 for the opening and signature in some countries.
\r
7082 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7087 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
\r
7088 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
\r
7089 Here's an example of each:
\r
7092 \begin_layout Right Address
\r
7094 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
7098 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
7102 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
7105 When is it? What is today?
\r
7108 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7112 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7118 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which LyX sets to
\r
7119 fit the largest block of text on a single line.
\r
7120 Here's an example of the
\r
7127 \begin_layout Address
\r
7129 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
7132 Where do I send this
\r
7133 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
7136 Your post office and country
\r
7139 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7140 As you can see, both
\r
7147 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7152 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
\r
7157 in either of these environments, LyX resets the nesting depth and sets
\r
7158 the environment to
\r
7163 This makes sense, since
\r
7168 \family typewriter
\r
7171 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
\r
7172 Thus, you have to use
\r
7173 \family typewriter
\r
7179 arg "newline-insert newline"
\r
7184 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
7185 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
7187 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7191 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7196 ) to start a new line in an
\r
7203 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7211 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
7215 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7216 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
\r
7217 or list of references.
\r
7218 LyX contains paragraph environments for both of these.
\r
7221 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
7225 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
7228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
7237 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7242 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
\r
7243 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
\r
7244 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
\r
7245 Also, don't bother trying to nest
\r
7249 in anything else or
\r
7259 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
\r
7260 The book document classes ignores the
\r
7264 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
\r
7268 in a letter document class.
\r
7271 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7276 environment does several things for you.
\r
7277 First, it puts the centered label
\r
7278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
7282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
7286 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
\r
7288 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
\r
7289 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
\r
7290 the subsequent text.
\r
7291 Well, that's how it will appear on the LyX screen.
\r
7292 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
\r
7296 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7297 Starting a new paragraph by entering
\r
7301 does not reset the paragraph environment.
\r
7302 The new paragraph will still be in the
\r
7307 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
\r
7308 finish entering the abstract of your document.
\r
7311 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7312 \begin_inset Float figure
\r
7317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
7319 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
7320 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
\r
7327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
7328 \begin_inset Caption Standard
\r
7330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
7331 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
7332 LatexCommand label
\r
7333 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
\r
7354 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7355 We would love to demonstrate the
\r
7359 environment, but since this document is in the
\r
7360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
7364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
7367 class, we can't do this.
\r
7368 We inserted it therefore as figure
\r
7369 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
7375 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
\r
7380 If you have never heard of an
\r
7381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
7385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
7388 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
\r
7391 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
7397 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
7400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
7407 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
7408 LatexCommand label
\r
7409 name "sub:Biblio_environment"
\r
7416 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7421 environment is used to list references.
\r
7422 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
\r
7423 only use it at the end of the document.
\r
7428 in anything else or
\r
7435 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7436 When you first open a
\r
7440 environment, LyX adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
\r
7441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
7445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
7449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
7453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
7456 depending on the document class.
\r
7457 The heading is in a large boldface font.
\r
7458 Each paragraph of the
\r
7462 environment is a bibliography entry.
\r
7467 does not reset the paragraph environment.
\r
7468 Each new paragraph is still in the
\r
7475 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7476 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
\r
7477 by using a BibTeX database.
\r
7478 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of LyX's bibliogra
\r
7479 phy handling, have a look at section
\r
7480 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7484 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
7486 reference "sec:Bibliography"
\r
7493 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
7497 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
7500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
7501 Paragraph ! LyX code
\r
7507 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
7508 LatexCommand label
\r
7509 name "sub:LyX-Code"
\r
7516 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7521 environment is another LyX extension.
\r
7522 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
\r
7523 It also treats the
\r
7527 key as a fixed whitespace;
\r
7531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
7540 key is treated as a
\r
7543 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7548 instead of an end-of-word marker.
\r
7553 this is the only case in which you can type multiple whitespaces in LyX.
\r
7554 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
\r
7557 arg "newline-insert newline"
\r
7561 \family typewriter
\r
7569 breaks paragraphs.
\r
7570 Note, however, that
\r
7574 does not reset the paragraph environment.
\r
7575 So, when you finish using the
\r
7579 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
\r
7580 Also, you can nest the
\r
7584 environment inside of others.
\r
7587 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7588 There are a few quirks with this environment:
\r
7591 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
7595 arg "newline-insert newline"
\r
7598 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
\r
7599 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
7603 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
7613 arg "newline-insert newline"
\r
7619 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
7620 You can't follow a
\r
7623 arg "newline-insert newline"
\r
7634 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
7639 to begin a new paragraph, then you can use a
\r
7646 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
7650 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
\r
7657 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
7658 You can't have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
\r
7659 You must put at least one
\r
7663 in any line you want blank.
\r
7664 Otherwise, LaTeX generates errors.
\r
7667 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
7668 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
\r
7672 since that will insert
\r
7677 You get the typewriter double quotes with
\r
7680 arg "self-insert \""
\r
7686 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7687 Here is an example:
\r
7690 \begin_layout LyX-Code
\r
7691 #include <stdio.h>
\r
7694 \begin_layout LyX-Code
\r
7698 \begin_layout LyX-Code
\r
7702 \begin_layout LyX-Code
\r
7706 \begin_layout LyX-Code
\r
7707 printf("Hello World!
\r
7712 \begin_layout LyX-Code
\r
7716 \begin_layout LyX-Code
\r
7720 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7721 This is just the standard
\r
7722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
7726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
7733 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7738 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts,
\r
7739 rc-files, and so on.
\r
7740 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
\r
7741 as if you used a typewriter.
\r
7742 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
7745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
7746 Paragraph environments|)
\r
7751 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
\r
7754 Program Code Listings
\r
7759 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7767 \begin_layout Section
\r
7768 Nesting Environments
\r
7769 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
7772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
7773 Nesting ! Environments
\r
7779 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
7780 LatexCommand label
\r
7781 name "sec:Nesting"
\r
7788 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
7792 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7793 LyX treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific
\r
7795 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
\r
7797 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
\r
7798 has two subpoints.
\r
7799 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
\r
7801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
7805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
7811 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
7815 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
7820 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
7824 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
7829 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
7833 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7834 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
\r
7835 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
\r
7837 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
7839 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7843 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7851 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7855 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7860 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
\r
7862 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
\r
7865 arg "depth-increment"
\r
7871 arg "depth-decrement"
\r
7874 or the key bindings
\r
7885 arg "depth-increment"
\r
7891 arg "depth-decrement"
\r
7895 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
\r
7896 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
\r
7900 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7901 Note that LyX only changes the nesting depth if it can.
\r
7902 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
\r
7903 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
\r
7904 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
\r
7907 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7908 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
\r
7909 In LyX, you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're
\r
7910 about to find out.
\r
7911 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
\r
7914 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
7915 What You Can and Can't Nest
\r
7918 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7919 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
\r
7920 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
\r
7923 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7924 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
\r
7925 than a simple yes or no.
\r
7926 There are three types of paragraph environments:
\r
7929 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
7930 Completely unnestable
\r
7933 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
7934 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
\r
7935 things inside them.
\r
7938 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
7939 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
\r
7940 anything into them.
\r
7943 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7944 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
\r
7945 environments have them:
\r
7948 \begin_layout Description
\r
7949 Unnestable Can't nest them.
\r
7950 Can't nest into them.
\r
7954 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
7960 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
7966 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
7972 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
7978 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
7985 \begin_layout Description
\r
7987 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7990 Nestable You can nest them.
\r
7991 You can nest other things into them.
\r
7995 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8001 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8007 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8013 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8019 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8025 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8031 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8037 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8044 \begin_layout Description
\r
8045 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
\r
8046 You can't nest anything into them.
\r
8050 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8056 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8062 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8068 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8074 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8080 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8086 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8092 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8098 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8104 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8110 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8116 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8122 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8128 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8132 \begin_inset space ~
\r
8138 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8145 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8146 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
8149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8154 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
\r
8164 \begin_inset space ~
\r
8167 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
\r
8168 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
\r
8169 nested section headings violate this.
\r
8177 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
8178 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
\r
8179 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
8182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8183 Nesting ! Tables etc.
\r
8191 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8192 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
\r
8193 affected by nesting anyhow.
\r
8197 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8201 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8205 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8209 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8211 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
8214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8219 Figures and tables in
\r
8223 are not affected by this.
\r
8228 Have a look at section
\r
8229 \begin_inset space ~
\r
8233 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
8235 reference "sec:Floats"
\r
8239 for more information about
\r
8246 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8247 LyX can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
\r
8248 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
\r
8252 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8253 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
\r
8254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
8258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
8261 of its own, it behaves just like a
\r
8262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
8266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
8269 paragraph environment.
\r
8270 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
\r
8274 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8275 Here's an example with a table:
\r
8278 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8283 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8284 This is (a) and it's nested.
\r
8288 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8289 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
\r
8295 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8297 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
8298 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
\r
8299 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
8300 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
8301 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
8303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
8306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
8324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
8344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
8362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8385 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8386 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
\r
8393 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8395 The table is actually nested inside (a).
\r
8399 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8403 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8404 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
\r
8407 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8412 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8413 This is (a) and it's nested.
\r
8417 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8418 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
\r
8424 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8426 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
8427 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
\r
8428 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
8429 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
8430 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
8432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
8435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
8453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
8473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
8491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8514 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8515 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
\r
8521 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8527 nested inside (a).
\r
8528 In fact, it's not nested at all.
\r
8531 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8535 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8536 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
\r
8537 item of a new list!
\r
8540 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8541 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
\r
8543 LyX then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
\r
8546 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8551 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8552 This is (a) and it's nested.
\r
8555 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8556 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
\r
8562 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8564 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
8565 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
\r
8566 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
8567 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
8568 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
8570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
8573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
8591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
8611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
8629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8653 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8654 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
\r
8660 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8662 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
\r
8669 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8673 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8674 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
\r
8680 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
\r
8681 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
\r
8685 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
8686 Usage and General Features
\r
8689 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8690 Speaking of levels, LyX can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
\r
8692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
8696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
8699 is the innermost possible depth.
\r
8700 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
\r
8703 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8704 level #1 – outermost
\r
8708 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8713 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8718 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8723 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8728 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8737 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8738 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
\r
8739 both of them in the example.
\r
8740 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
\r
8750 For example, if we tried to nest another
\r
8755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
8759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
8762 , we would get errors.
\r
8765 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
8767 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
8770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8771 Nesting ! Examples
\r
8779 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8780 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
\r
8781 We have several examples of nested environments.
\r
8782 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
\r
8786 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
8787 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
\r
8790 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
8791 \labelwidthstring MMM
\r
8792 #1-a This is the outermost level.
\r
8801 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
8802 \labelwidthstring MMM
\r
8803 #2-a This is level #2.
\r
8804 We created it by using
\r
8807 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
8813 arg "depth-increment"
\r
8820 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
8821 \labelwidthstring MMM
\r
8822 #3-a This is level #3.
\r
8823 This time, we just enter
\r
8830 arg "depth-increment"
\r
8834 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
\r
8838 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
8844 arg "depth-increment"
\r
8851 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8852 This is actually a
\r
8856 environment, nested inside of
\r
8857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
8861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
8865 So, it's at level #4.
\r
8866 We did this by entering
\r
8869 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
8875 arg "depth-increment"
\r
8878 , then changing the paragraph environment to
\r
8883 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
\r
8899 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8904 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
\r
8907 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
8913 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
8914 \labelwidthstring MMM
\r
8915 #4-a This is level #4.
\r
8919 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
8922 and changed the paragraph environment back to
\r
8927 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
\r
8931 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
\r
8936 keep nesting things inside
\r
8937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
8941 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
8948 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
8949 \labelwidthstring MMM
\r
8950 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar \ldots{}
\r
8955 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
8956 \labelwidthstring MMM
\r
8957 #6-a \SpecialChar \ldots{}
\r
8958 and this is level #6.
\r
8959 By now, you should know how we made these two.
\r
8963 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
8964 \labelwidthstring MMM
\r
8965 #5-b Back to level #5.
\r
8969 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
8975 arg "depth-decrement"
\r
8982 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
8983 \labelwidthstring MMM
\r
8984 #4-b After another
\r
8987 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
8993 arg "depth-decrement"
\r
8996 , we're back at level #4.
\r
9000 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
9001 \labelwidthstring MMM
\r
9002 #3-b Back to level #3.
\r
9003 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
\r
9007 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
9008 \labelwidthstring MMM
\r
9009 #2-b Back to level #2.
\r
9014 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
9015 \labelwidthstring MMM
\r
9016 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
\r
9017 After this sentence, we will enter
\r
9021 and change the paragraph environment back to
\r
9028 \begin_layout Standard
\r
9029 We could have also used the
\r
9045 environment in place of the
\r
9050 The example would have worked exactly the same.
\r
9053 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
9054 Example 2: Inheritance
\r
9057 \begin_layout LyX-Code
\r
9058 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
\r
9061 \begin_layout LyX-Code
\r
9063 Now we will enter
\r
9070 arg "depth-increment"
\r
9074 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
9077 which, we will change to the
\r
9085 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9090 environment, at level #2.
\r
9093 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9094 Notice how the nested
\r
9098 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
\r
9102 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
\r
9106 \begin_layout Standard
\r
9107 We ended this example by entering
\r
9112 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
\r
9116 and reset the nesting depth by using
\r
9119 arg "depth-decrement"
\r
9125 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
9126 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
\r
9135 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
9138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
9139 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
\r
9147 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9148 This is level #1, in an
\r
9152 paragraph environment.
\r
9153 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
\r
9157 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9162 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
9168 arg "depth-increment"
\r
9172 Now, what happens if we nest an
\r
9176 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
\r
9177 label be? An asterisk?
\r
9181 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
9182 No! It's a bullet.
\r
9191 environment, even though it's at level #3.
\r
9192 So, its label is a bullet.
\r
9193 (We got here by using
\r
9196 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
9202 arg "depth-increment"
\r
9205 , then changing the environment to
\r
9213 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
9214 Here's level #4, produced using
\r
9217 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
9223 arg "depth-increment"
\r
9227 We will do that again\SpecialChar \ldots{}
\r
9232 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9233 \SpecialChar \ldots{}
\r
9234 to get to level #5.
\r
9235 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
\r
9240 Notice the type of numbering, it is
\r
9244 , because we are in the
\r
9252 environment (that is, it is an
\r
9267 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9268 What happens if we
\r
9272 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
\r
9273 type of numbering does LyX use?
\r
9276 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9277 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
\r
9280 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
9283 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
\r
9286 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9290 arg "depth-decrement"
\r
9293 to decrease the depth after the next
\r
9296 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
9303 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9305 Look what type of label LyX is using!
\r
9309 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9311 Even though we've changed levels, LyX is still using a lowercase Roman
\r
9312 numeral as the label.Why?
\r
9315 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9316 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
\r
9325 Notice, however, that LyX
\r
9329 reset the counter for the label.
\r
9333 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9337 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
9343 arg "depth-decrement"
\r
9346 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
\r
9347 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
\r
9348 into the twofold-nested
\r
9356 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9357 The same thing happens if we do another
\r
9360 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
9366 arg "depth-decrement"
\r
9369 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
\r
9372 \begin_layout Standard
\r
9373 Lastly, we reset the environment to
\r
9378 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
\r
9388 The number of other
\r
9392 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label LyX uses for
\r
9398 The same rule applies for the
\r
9402 environment, as well.
\r
9405 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
9406 Example 4: Going Bonkers
\r
9409 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9410 We're going to go totally nuts now.
\r
9411 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
\r
9412 the same detail with how we did it.
\r
9421 \begin_layout Standard
\r
9429 arg "depth-increment"
\r
9436 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
\r
9437 the example in parentheses someplace.
\r
9438 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
\r
9439 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
\r
9440 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
\r
9444 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9449 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
\r
9453 \begin_layout Verse
\r
9454 Now we will add verse.
\r
9455 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
9458 It will get much worse.
\r
9459 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
9469 arg "depth-increment"
\r
9479 \begin_layout Verse
\r
9480 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
\r
9481 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
9484 Bippitey boppitey boo!
\r
9485 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
9491 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
9499 \begin_layout Verse
\r
9500 Here comes a table:
\r
9504 \begin_layout Standard
\r
9505 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
\r
9511 \begin_layout Standard
\r
9513 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
9514 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
\r
9515 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
9516 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
9517 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
9519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
9522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
9537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
9540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
9557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
\r
9560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
9575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
9578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
9602 \begin_layout Verse
\r
9606 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
9616 arg "depth-increment"
\r
9622 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
9632 arg "depth-decrement"
\r
9639 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9644 : level #1) This is another item.
\r
9645 Note that selecting a
\r
9649 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
\r
9650 3 times to put the table inside the
\r
9658 \begin_layout Quotation
\r
9659 We're now ending the
\r
9663 list and changing to
\r
9668 We're still at level #1.
\r
9669 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
\r
9670 The next set of paragraphs is a
\r
9671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
9675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
9678 We will nest both the
\r
9685 \begin_inset space ~
\r
9690 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
\r
9694 for the letter body.
\r
9698 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
9701 to preserve the depth.
\r
9702 Remember that you need to use
\r
9705 arg "newline-insert newline"
\r
9708 to create multiple lines inside the
\r
9715 \begin_inset space ~
\r
9725 \begin_layout Right Address
\r
9727 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
9730 Moosegroin, MT 00100
\r
9731 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
9737 \begin_layout Address
\r
9739 \begin_inset space ~
\r
9745 \begin_layout Quotation
\r
9746 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
\r
9747 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
9750 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
\r
9751 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
\r
9752 a backlog in our orders for methane.
\r
9753 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
\r
9754 as soon as possible.
\r
9755 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
\r
9758 \begin_layout Quotation
\r
9759 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
\r
9760 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
\r
9761 with your order, along with payment.
\r
9764 \begin_layout Quotation
\r
9765 We thank you again for your patience.
\r
9768 \begin_layout Address
\r
9770 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
9777 \begin_layout Quotation
\r
9778 That ends that example!
\r
9781 \begin_layout Standard
\r
9782 As you can see, nesting environments in LyX gives you a lot of power with
\r
9783 just a few keystrokes.
\r
9784 We could have easily nested an
\r
9805 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
\r
9808 \begin_layout Section
\r
9809 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
\r
9810 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
9813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
9822 \begin_layout Standard
\r
9823 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
\r
9824 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, LyX offers
\r
9825 you more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
\r
9826 be broken at the end of a line.
\r
9827 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
\r
9831 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
9833 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
9834 LatexCommand label
\r
9835 name "sub:Protected-Space"
\r
9840 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
9843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
9844 Spaces ! Protected
\r
9852 \begin_layout Standard
\r
9853 The protected space: It is used to tell LyX (and LaTeX) not to break the
\r
9854 line at that point.
\r
9855 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
\r
9858 \begin_layout Quote
\r
9859 Further documentation is given in section
\r
9860 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
9864 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
9866 reference "sec:Bibliography"
\r
9874 \begin_layout Standard
\r
9875 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
\r
9876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
9880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
9884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
9888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
9890 reference "sec:Bibliography"
\r
9895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
9899 A protected space is set with
\r
9901 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
9902 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
9904 \begin_inset space ~
\r
9912 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
\r
9918 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
9920 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
9921 LatexCommand label
\r
9922 name "sub:Horizontal-Space"
\r
9927 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
9930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
9931 Spacing ! Horizontal
\r
9939 \begin_layout Standard
\r
9940 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
\r
9942 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
9943 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
9947 The length units are listed in Appendix
\r
9948 \begin_inset space ~
\r
9952 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
9954 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
\r
9961 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
9963 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
9964 LatexCommand label
\r
9965 name "sub:Inter-word-Space"
\r
9970 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
9973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
9974 Spaces ! Inter-word
\r
9982 \begin_layout Standard
\r
9983 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
\r
9984 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
\r
9985 at the ends of sentences.
\r
9986 There is no need to do this as LyX automatically takes care about this.
\r
9987 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
\r
9988 followed by a period; see section
\r
9989 \begin_inset space ~
\r
9993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
9995 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
\r
10000 To insert a normal space, select
\r
10002 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
10003 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
10005 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10011 \begin_inset Info
\r
10013 arg "space-insert normal"
\r
10019 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
10021 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
10022 LatexCommand label
\r
10023 name "sub:Thin-Space"
\r
10028 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
10031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10040 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
10046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
10049 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
\r
10050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
10054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
10058 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
\r
10059 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
\r
10060 inside abbreviations:
\r
10063 \begin_layout Quote
\r
10065 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10069 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
\r
10072 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10073 or between values and units.
\r
10074 Compare for example this:
\r
10075 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
10079 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10083 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
10086 10 kg (normal space
\r
10089 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10090 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
\r
10092 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
10093 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
10095 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10101 \begin_inset Info
\r
10103 arg "space-insert thin"
\r
10109 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
10113 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10114 You can also insert the following space types:
\r
10117 \begin_layout Description
\r
10119 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10123 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10126 space A line with a
\r
10127 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
\r
10131 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
\r
10135 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
\r
10138 negative thin space between the arrows.
\r
10141 \begin_layout Description
\r
10143 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10147 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10150 em) A line with an
\r
10151 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
\r
10155 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
\r
10159 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
\r
10163 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10167 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10170 em) space between the arrows.
\r
10173 \begin_layout Description
\r
10175 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10179 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10182 em) A line with a
\r
10183 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
\r
10187 \begin_inset space \quad{}
\r
10191 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
\r
10195 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10199 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10202 em) space between the arrows.
\r
10205 \begin_layout Description
\r
10207 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10211 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10214 em) A line with a
\r
10215 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
\r
10219 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
\r
10223 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
\r
10227 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10231 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10234 em) space between the arrows.
\r
10237 \begin_layout Description
\r
10239 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10242 space A line with
\r
10243 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
\r
10247 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
\r
10252 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
\r
10256 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10259 cm space between the arrows.
\r
10262 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10264 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10268 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
10270 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
\r
10274 lists the different space sizes.
\r
10277 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10278 \begin_inset Float table
\r
10283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10285 \begin_inset Caption
\r
10287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10288 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
10289 LatexCommand label
\r
10290 name "tab:Width-of-the"
\r
10294 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
\r
10302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10304 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
10305 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="8" columns="2">
\r
10306 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
10307 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0">
\r
10308 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0">
\r
10310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10311 \begin_inset Text
\r
10313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10322 \begin_inset Text
\r
10324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10335 \begin_inset Text
\r
10337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10344 \begin_inset Text
\r
10346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10348 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10359 \begin_inset Text
\r
10361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10368 \begin_inset Text
\r
10370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10372 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10383 \begin_inset Text
\r
10385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10392 \begin_inset Text
\r
10394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10396 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10407 \begin_inset Text
\r
10409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10416 \begin_inset Text
\r
10418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10420 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10431 \begin_inset Text
\r
10433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10435 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10444 \begin_inset Text
\r
10446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10448 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10459 \begin_inset Text
\r
10461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10463 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10472 \begin_inset Text
\r
10474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10476 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10487 \begin_inset Text
\r
10489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10491 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10500 \begin_inset Text
\r
10502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10504 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10525 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
10531 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
10534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10543 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10544 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special LyX feature for adding extra space
\r
10545 in a uniform fashion.
\r
10546 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
\r
10547 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
\r
10548 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
\r
10549 equally between themselves.
\r
10552 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10553 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
\r
10556 \begin_layout Quote
\r
10558 This is on the left side
\r
10559 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
10562 This is on the right
\r
10565 \begin_layout Quote
\r
10568 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
10572 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
10578 \begin_layout Quote
\r
10581 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
10585 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
10589 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
10595 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10596 That was an example in the
\r
10602 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
\r
10606 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
10610 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
\r
10613 is one in a standard paragraph.
\r
10614 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
\r
10618 sitting in-between the two arrows.
\r
10621 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10622 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
\r
10625 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10630 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
\r
10633 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10635 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
\r
10639 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10645 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10647 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
\r
10651 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10657 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10659 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
\r
10663 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10669 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10671 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
\r
10675 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10681 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10683 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
\r
10687 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10693 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10695 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
\r
10699 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10705 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10706 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
10709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10714 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
\r
10718 in the first line in a paragraph, LyX ignores it.
\r
10719 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
\r
10720 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
\r
10724 option in the space dialog.
\r
10732 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
10734 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
10735 LatexCommand label
\r
10736 name "sub:Phantom-Space"
\r
10741 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
10744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10745 Spacing ! Phantom
\r
10753 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10754 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
\r
10755 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
\r
10758 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10759 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
\r
10762 What is correct English?:
\r
10763 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
10767 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
10771 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10774 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
\r
10775 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
10779 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
\r
10782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10790 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
10794 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
\r
10797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10805 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
\r
10811 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10813 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
\r
10814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
10818 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10822 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
10830 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
\r
10832 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
10833 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
10837 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
\r
10838 lines and insert
\r
10839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
10843 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10847 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
10854 into the phantom inset (note the space after
\r
10855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
10859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
10863 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
\r
10864 That is why it is named
\r
10865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
10869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
10873 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
\r
10874 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
\r
10878 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
10880 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
10881 LatexCommand label
\r
10882 name "sub:Vertical-Space"
\r
10887 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
10890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10891 Spacing ! Vertical
\r
10899 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10900 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
\r
10902 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
10903 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
10905 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10911 There you find the following sizes:
\r
10914 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10927 are LaTeX sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
\r
10932 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
\r
10934 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
10935 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
10937 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10943 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
10946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10947 Document ! Settings
\r
10952 for the paragraph separation.
\r
10953 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
\r
10964 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10970 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
10973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10979 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
\r
10980 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
\r
10985 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
\r
10986 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
\r
10995 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
\r
10996 \begin_inset Foot
\r
10999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11004 s are described in section
\r
11005 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11009 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
11011 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
\r
11020 If there are several
\r
11024 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
\r
11025 You can therefore use
\r
11029 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
\r
11032 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11037 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
\r
11038 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
11044 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
\r
11051 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11052 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
11055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11062 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
\r
11063 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
\r
11075 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
11076 Paragraph Alignment
\r
11077 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
11080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11081 Paragraph ! Alignment
\r
11089 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11090 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
\r
11092 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11093 Paragraph Settings
\r
11095 dialog (toolbar button
\r
11096 \begin_inset Info
\r
11098 arg "layout-paragraph"
\r
11102 There are five possibilities:
\r
11105 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
11111 \begin_inset Info
\r
11113 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
\r
11119 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
11125 \begin_inset Info
\r
11127 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
\r
11133 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
11139 \begin_inset Info
\r
11141 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
\r
11147 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
11153 \begin_inset Info
\r
11155 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
\r
11161 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
11167 \begin_inset Info
\r
11169 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
\r
11175 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11176 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
\r
11177 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
\r
11178 the left and right margins.
\r
11179 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
\r
11182 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11184 This paragraph is right aligned,
\r
11187 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11189 this one is centered,
\r
11192 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11194 this one is left aligned.
\r
11197 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
11198 Forced Page Breaks
\r
11199 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
11202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11203 Page breaks ! Forced
\r
11209 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
11210 LatexCommand label
\r
11211 name "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
\r
11218 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11219 If you don't like the way LaTeX does the page breaks in your document, you
\r
11220 can force a page break where you want one.
\r
11221 Normally this will not be necessary, because LaTeX is good at page breaking.
\r
11222 Only if you use a lot of
\r
11226 , LaTeX's page breaking algorithm can fail.
\r
11229 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11230 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
\r
11231 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
\r
11235 have to change the page breaking.
\r
11238 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11239 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
\r
11241 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
\r
11243 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11244 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11246 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11252 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
\r
11254 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11255 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11257 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11262 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
\r
11263 the complete page.
\r
11264 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
\r
11265 on which only the last few lines are absent.
\r
11268 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11269 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
\r
11270 at the top of a page.
\r
11271 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
\r
11272 LyX gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
\r
11273 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
\r
11274 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
\r
11276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
11278 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
\r
11282 to learn more about
\r
11289 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
11290 Clear Page Breaks
\r
11291 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
11292 LatexCommand label
\r
11293 name "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
\r
11298 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
11301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11302 Page breaks ! Clear
\r
11310 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11311 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
\r
11312 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
\r
11313 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
\r
11314 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
\r
11315 it, if necessary by adding pages.
\r
11318 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11319 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
\r
11321 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11322 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11324 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11330 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
\r
11332 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11333 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11335 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11339 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11344 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
\r
11345 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
\r
11348 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
11349 Forced Line Breaks
\r
11350 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
11353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11360 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
11361 LatexCommand label
\r
11362 name "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
\r
11369 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11370 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
\r
11372 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
\r
11374 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11375 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11377 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11381 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11387 \begin_inset Info
\r
11389 arg "newline-insert newline"
\r
11393 Another type that is inserted via the menu
\r
11395 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11396 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11398 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11402 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11408 \begin_inset Info
\r
11410 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
\r
11413 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
\r
11414 the page margins.
\r
11415 This is useful to avoid
\r
11416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
11420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
11423 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
\r
11426 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11427 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct LaTeX's line breaking, as
\r
11428 LaTeX is very good at line breaking.
\r
11429 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
\r
11430 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
\r
11431 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11435 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
11437 reference "sec:Quote"
\r
11442 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
11444 reference "sec:Verse"
\r
11449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
11451 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
\r
11458 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
11460 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
11461 LatexCommand label
\r
11462 name "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
\r
11467 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
11470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11479 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11481 \begin_inset CommandInset line
\r
11482 LatexCommand rule
\r
11492 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11496 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11497 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11499 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11504 you can insert horizontal lines.
\r
11505 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
\r
11506 of the current text line or the paragraph.
\r
11507 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
\r
11510 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11512 \begin_inset CommandInset line
\r
11513 LatexCommand rule
\r
11523 \begin_layout Section
\r
11524 Characters and Symbols
\r
11527 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11528 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
\r
11529 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
\r
11530 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
\r
11532 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
11536 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
11538 reference "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
\r
11542 for information on how this is done.
\r
11545 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11546 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
\r
11551 dialog via the menu
\r
11553 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11554 Special Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11560 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11561 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
11564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11569 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
\r
11570 when you are using a special screen font in LyX's preferences.
\r
11571 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
\r
11579 \begin_layout Section
\r
11580 Fonts and Text Styles
\r
11581 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
11582 LatexCommand label
\r
11583 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
\r
11590 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
11592 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
11595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11604 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11605 There are two types of fonts:
\r
11608 \begin_layout Description
\r
11610 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11614 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
11617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11623 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
\r
11624 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
11628 characters) in the font.
\r
11629 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
\r
11630 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
\r
11631 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
\r
11632 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
\r
11633 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
\r
11634 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
\r
11635 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
\r
11636 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
11639 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
\r
11640 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
\r
11641 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
\r
11642 sizes than at small ones.
\r
11643 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
11647 \family typewriter
\r
11651 \family typewriter
\r
11655 \family typewriter
\r
11657 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11662 are vector fonts.
\r
11665 \begin_layout Description
\r
11667 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11671 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
11674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11680 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
\r
11681 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
\r
11682 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
\r
11683 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
\r
11684 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
\r
11685 image manipulation program.
\r
11686 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
\r
11687 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
\r
11688 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11691 pixels high up to 34
\r
11692 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11695 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
\r
11696 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
\r
11697 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
\r
11699 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
\r
11700 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
\r
11701 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
11704 Bitmap fonts are named
\r
11705 \family typewriter
\r
11707 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11712 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
\r
11715 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11716 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
\r
11717 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
\r
11718 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
\r
11719 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
\r
11720 use scalable fonts.
\r
11723 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11724 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
\r
11727 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11728 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
\r
11729 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
\r
11730 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
\r
11731 font to emphasize text, you use an
\r
11732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
11736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
11740 This concept fits in perfectly with LyX.
\r
11741 In LyX, you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
\r
11745 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
11746 LaTeX font support
\r
11747 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
11748 LatexCommand label
\r
11749 name "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
\r
11756 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11757 Traditionally, LaTeX used its own fonts.
\r
11758 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
\r
11759 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your LaTeX
\r
11761 The reason is that LaTeX needs some extra information about the fonts,
\r
11762 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
\r
11763 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
\r
11764 to a word processor.
\r
11765 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
\r
11766 are generally of very good quality, and that LaTeX files are very portable
\r
11767 across different machines.
\r
11768 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional LaTeX has increased a
\r
11769 lot in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
\r
11771 In LyX, only a subset of these are directly selectable via the user interface
\r
11773 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11777 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
11779 reference "sub:Document-Font"
\r
11784 However, all the others are available if you enter the relevant LaTeX code
\r
11785 in the document preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired
\r
11789 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11790 Recent developments brought some new LaTeX engines that are also able directly
\r
11791 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely XeTeX
\r
11793 Both engines are supported by LyX.
\r
11794 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
\r
11795 that is installed on your system.
\r
11796 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
\r
11799 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11800 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
11803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11808 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
\r
11809 es; so you might have to experiment.
\r
11817 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11818 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
11821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11826 XeTeX and especially LuaTeX, are still rather new and thus not as mature
\r
11827 as traditional LaTeX or PDFTeX.
\r
11835 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
11836 Document Font and Font size
\r
11837 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
11838 LatexCommand label
\r
11839 name "sub:Document-Font"
\r
11844 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
11847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11854 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
11857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11866 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11867 You can set the document fonts in the
\r
11869 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11873 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
11876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11877 Document ! Settings
\r
11887 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
\r
11888 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
\r
11891 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11897 \family typewriter
\r
11900 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
\r
11901 for (some) sans serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit
\r
11902 with the roman font.
\r
11905 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11921 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
\r
11922 This requires that you use
\r
11928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11967 as the output format, i.
\r
11968 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
11972 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
11975 you will have to have either XeTeX or LuaTeX installed (see section
\r
11976 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
11982 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
\r
11987 You will then not have access to TeX's own fonts.
\r
11988 Note that LyX then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists
\r
11990 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11993 serif, and typewriter), since LyX cannot determine the family.
\r
11994 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
\r
11995 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar \slash{}
\r
11996 or font failures.
\r
11997 LyX cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
\r
12000 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12001 If you use TeX fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the
\r
12006 and a list of fonts available with your LaTeX distribution.
\r
12011 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
\r
12012 In most cases, this will be the standard TeX font, known as
\r
12013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
12017 \family typewriter
\r
12019 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
12029 \family typewriter
\r
12033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
12037 \family typewriter
\r
12038 European Computer Modern
\r
12041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
12045 \family typewriter
\r
12048 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
\r
12051 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12053 \family typewriter
\r
12057 \family typewriter
\r
12060 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
\r
12061 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
\r
12062 \begin_inset Foot
\r
12065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
12066 This problem doesn't appear if you read PDFs in
\r
12067 \family typewriter
\r
12069 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12074 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
\r
12080 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
\r
12081 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
\r
12084 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
12088 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12093 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
\r
12095 \family typewriter
\r
12099 \family typewriter
\r
12106 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12111 was developed for the LaTeX community in order to replace
\r
12112 \family typewriter
\r
12115 as the default font.
\r
12116 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
\r
12117 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
\r
12120 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12125 looks identical to
\r
12126 \family typewriter
\r
12130 \begin_inset Foot
\r
12133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
12134 One difference is improved kerning.
\r
12142 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
12146 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12150 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12155 fonts in (the rare) case that
\r
12158 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12163 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
\r
12165 \family typewriter
\r
12169 \family typewriter
\r
12174 \family typewriter
\r
12177 is a virtual font.
\r
12178 Virtual means that it
\r
12179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
12183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
12187 \family typewriter
\r
12190 -glyphs from other fonts.
\r
12191 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
\r
12193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
12197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
12201 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
12205 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
12209 \begin_inset Foot
\r
12212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
12213 Loading the LaTeX-package
\r
12218 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
12221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
12222 LaTeX-packages ! aeguill
\r
12227 with the document preamble line
\r
12228 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
12235 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
\r
12236 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
12241 will fix the guillemet problem.
\r
12246 and that accented characters are not
\r
12250 glyph, but built of
\r
12254 characters, the accent and the letter.
\r
12255 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
\r
12257 \family typewriter
\r
12261 If you search for example for the French word
\r
12262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
12266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
12269 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
\r
12271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
12275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
12278 and not for the glyph
\r
12279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
12283 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12287 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
12293 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
12294 If you do not like the look of
\r
12295 \family typewriter
\r
12299 \family typewriter
\r
12302 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
\r
12303 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
12307 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12311 \family typewriter
\r
12313 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12319 \family typewriter
\r
12323 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
\r
12324 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12327 serif and typewriter fonts,
\r
12328 \begin_inset Foot
\r
12331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
12332 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
\r
12333 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
12339 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12348 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
\r
12349 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
12353 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
12361 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
12365 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
12371 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12379 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12389 but you can also select your own.
\r
12390 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
12393 The differences between roman,
\r
12396 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12402 \family typewriter
\r
12405 fonts are explained in section
\r
12406 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12410 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
12412 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
\r
12417 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
12423 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12428 was originally designed for newspapers.
\r
12429 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
\r
12430 into the small newspaper columns.
\r
12434 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12439 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
\r
12442 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12443 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
\r
12456 Some classes provide additional sizes.
\r
12461 depends on the class you are using.
\r
12462 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
\r
12465 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12466 Note that the font size is the
\r
12471 That means that LyX scales all other possible font sizes (such as those
\r
12472 used in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
\r
12473 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
\r
12476 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12481 dialog if needed.
\r
12482 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
\r
12483 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
12489 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
\r
12496 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12500 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12505 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
\r
12507 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12510 serif or typewriter.
\r
12515 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
\r
12525 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
\r
12528 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12530 \family typewriter
\r
12537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
12546 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
\r
12547 the LaTeX-package
\r
12552 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
12555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
12556 LaTeX-packages ! fontenc
\r
12562 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12566 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
12568 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
\r
12573 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
\r
12574 Unless you have specific reasons, use
\r
12581 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12582 With some fonts, the checkboxes
\r
12584 Use Old Style Figures
\r
12588 Use True Small Caps
\r
12591 These are extra features some fonts provide.
\r
12594 Use Old Style Figures
\r
12596 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
\r
12598 Old style figures are the numerals (0
\r
12599 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
12603 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
12606 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
\r
12610 Use True Small Caps
\r
12612 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
\r
12613 of scaled capitals.
\r
12614 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
\r
12615 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
\r
12618 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12623 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
\r
12624 a font to display the script characters.
\r
12625 \begin_inset Foot
\r
12628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
12629 The font will be the argument for the commands of the LaTeX-package
\r
12634 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
12637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
12638 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
\r
12643 So this has no effect for the document language
\r
12647 that does not use
\r
12657 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
\r
12661 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
12664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
12669 When you choose a new font or font size, LyX does
\r
12673 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
\r
12674 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
\r
12675 LyX's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
\r
12677 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
12680 dialog, see section
\r
12681 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12685 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
12687 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
\r
12699 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
12700 Using Different Character Styles
\r
12701 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
12704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
12711 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
12714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
12723 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12724 As we've already seen, LyX automatically changes the character style for
\r
12725 certain paragraph environments.
\r
12726 LyX supports two character styles,
\r
12735 You can activate both of these styles via keybindings, the menus, and the
\r
12739 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12744 style, do one of the following:
\r
12747 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
12748 click on the toolbar button
\r
12749 \begin_inset Info
\r
12757 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
12758 use the key binding
\r
12759 \begin_inset Info
\r
12767 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12768 These commands are all toggles.
\r
12773 style is already active, they deactivate it.
\r
12776 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12777 One typically uses the
\r
12781 style for proper names.
\r
12783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
12790 is the original author of LyX.
\r
12791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
12797 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12798 A more widely used character style is the
\r
12803 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
\r
12810 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
12811 clicking on the toolbar button
\r
12812 \begin_inset Info
\r
12820 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
12821 using the keybindings
\r
12822 \begin_inset Info
\r
12830 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12835 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or LaTeX-packag
\r
12836 es use a different font.
\r
12839 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12840 We've been using the
\r
12844 style all over the place in this document.
\r
12845 Here's one more example:
\r
12848 \begin_layout Quotation
\r
12851 Do not overuse character styles!
\r
12854 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12855 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
\r
12856 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
\r
12857 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
\r
12858 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
\r
12862 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12863 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
\r
12864 \begin_inset Info
\r
12866 arg "font-default"
\r
12871 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
12873 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12876 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
12880 \begin_inset Info
\r
12882 arg "dialog-show character"
\r
12888 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
12889 Fine-Tuning with the
\r
12894 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
12895 LatexCommand label
\r
12896 name "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
\r
12901 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
12904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
12913 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12914 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
\r
12915 LyX gives you a way to create a custom character style.
\r
12916 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
\r
12917 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
\r
12918 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
\r
12919 from ordinary dialog.
\r
12922 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12923 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
\r
12924 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
\r
12925 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
12928 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
\r
12929 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
\r
12932 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12933 To use custom character styles, open the
\r
12935 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
12937 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12940 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
12943 dialog or press the toolbar button
\r
12944 \begin_inset Info
\r
12946 arg "dialog-show character"
\r
12950 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
\r
12951 font property that you can choose.
\r
12952 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
\r
12955 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12960 , which keeps the current state of that property.
\r
12965 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
\r
12966 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
\r
12967 environments all at once.
\r
12970 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12971 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
\r
12974 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12986 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
12987 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
12993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
12997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13001 The possible options are:
\r
13005 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13006 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13011 This is the Roman font family.
\r
13012 Normally a serif font.
\r
13013 It's also the default family.
\r
13015 \begin_inset Info
\r
13023 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13024 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13028 \begin_inset space ~
\r
13035 This is the Sans Serif font family.
\r
13039 \begin_inset Info
\r
13047 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13048 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13054 \family typewriter
\r
13055 This is the Typewriter font family.
\r
13059 \begin_inset Info
\r
13061 arg "font-typewriter"
\r
13070 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13071 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13076 This corresponds to the print weight.
\r
13081 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13082 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13087 This is the Medium font series.
\r
13088 It's also the default series.
\r
13091 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13092 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13099 This is the Bold font series.
\r
13103 \begin_inset Info
\r
13112 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13113 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13118 As the name implies.
\r
13123 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13124 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13129 This is the Upright font shape.
\r
13130 It's also the default shape.
\r
13133 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13134 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13148 s the Italic font shape
\r
13154 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13155 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13162 This is the Slanted font shape
\r
13164 (although it might not be visible in LyX, this is different from italic).
\r
13167 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13168 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13172 \begin_inset space ~
\r
13179 This is the Small caps font shape
\r
13186 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13187 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13192 Alters the text color.
\r
13193 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
\r
13197 \begin_inset space ~
\r
13202 , which means that the document default color set in
\r
13204 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
13205 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
13211 \begin_inset space ~
\r
13216 is used, you can choose between
\r
13249 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
13252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
13261 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13262 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13267 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
\r
13268 the language of the document.
\r
13269 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
\r
13270 (only within LyX).
\r
13271 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
13274 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
\r
13275 LaTeX respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
\r
13276 When using the spell checking (see section
\r
13277 \begin_inset space ~
\r
13281 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
13283 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
\r
13287 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
\r
13290 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13291 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13296 Alters the size of the font.
\r
13297 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
\r
13298 proportional to the document font size.
\r
13299 Once again, you don't feed LyX the details, but a general description of
\r
13300 what you want to do.
\r
13305 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13306 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13325 \begin_inset Info
\r
13327 arg "font-size tiny"
\r
13333 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13334 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13353 \begin_inset Info
\r
13355 arg "font-size scriptsize"
\r
13361 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13362 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13368 \size footnotesize
\r
13370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13381 \begin_inset Info
\r
13383 arg "font-size footnotesize"
\r
13389 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13390 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13409 \begin_inset Info
\r
13411 arg "font-size small"
\r
13417 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13418 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13432 It's also the default size.
\r
13434 \begin_inset Info
\r
13436 arg "font-size normal"
\r
13442 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13443 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13462 \begin_inset Info
\r
13464 arg "font-size large"
\r
13470 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13471 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13490 \begin_inset Info
\r
13492 arg "font-size larger"
\r
13498 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13499 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13518 \begin_inset Info
\r
13520 arg "font-size largest"
\r
13526 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13527 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13535 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13539 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13546 \begin_inset Info
\r
13548 arg "font-size huge"
\r
13554 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13555 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13574 \begin_inset Info
\r
13576 arg "font-size giant"
\r
13582 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13583 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13588 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
\r
13589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13606 \begin_inset Info
\r
13608 arg "font-size increase"
\r
13614 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13615 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13620 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
\r
13621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13625 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13638 \begin_inset Info
\r
13640 arg "font-size decrease"
\r
13647 \begin_layout Standard
\r
13652 : don't go crazy with this feature.
\r
13653 You should almost never need to change the font size.
\r
13654 LyX automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
\r
13655 — use those instead.
\r
13656 This is here for fine-tuning only!
\r
13659 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13660 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13665 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
\r
13670 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13671 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13678 This is text with emphasize on
\r
13681 This might seem like the same as
\r
13685 , but it is actually a bit different.
\r
13691 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
\r
13693 Normally this font is equal to italic.
\r
13696 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13697 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13704 This is text with Underbar on.
\r
13708 \begin_inset Info
\r
13710 arg "font-underline"
\r
13716 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
13721 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
\r
13722 when you could not change fonts.
\r
13723 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
\r
13724 This is only possible in LyX because some people
\r
13728 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
\r
13731 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13732 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13736 \begin_inset space ~
\r
13743 This is text with Double underbar on.
\r
13747 \begin_inset Info
\r
13749 arg "font-underunderline"
\r
13753 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
13756 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
\r
13757 about double underbar.
\r
13760 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13761 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13765 \begin_inset space ~
\r
13772 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
\r
13776 \begin_inset Info
\r
13778 arg "font-underwave"
\r
13782 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
13785 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
\r
13786 Keep antinausea pills handy.
\r
13789 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13790 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13797 This is text with Strikeout on.
\r
13799 \strikeout default
\r
13801 \begin_inset Info
\r
13803 arg "font-strikeout"
\r
13807 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
13810 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
\r
13811 changed in the meantime.
\r
13814 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13815 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13822 This is text with Noun on.
\r
13829 , this is a logical attribute.
\r
13830 Normally it's equivalent to
\r
13833 \begin_inset space ~
\r
13842 \begin_layout Standard
\r
13843 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
\r
13844 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
\r
13846 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
13848 \begin_inset space ~
\r
13851 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
13855 \begin_inset Info
\r
13857 arg "dialog-show character"
\r
13860 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
\r
13861 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
\r
13862 \begin_inset Info
\r
13864 arg "textstyle-apply"
\r
13868 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
\r
13872 \begin_layout Standard
\r
13873 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
\r
13874 \begin_inset Info
\r
13876 arg "font-default"
\r
13880 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
\r
13881 (suppose you just set the shape to
\r
13882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13886 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13889 and the series to
\r
13890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13900 \begin_inset space ~
\r
13905 switch and press
\r
13912 \begin_layout Standard
\r
13913 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
\r
13921 \begin_inset space ~
\r
13933 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
13939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13946 font, which means every character has the same width; the
\r
13947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13951 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13954 is as wide as the
\r
13955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13963 Here is an example
\r
13964 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
13968 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
\r
13971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
13978 \family typewriter
\r
13982 \begin_inset Note Note
\r
13985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
13986 For more on phantoms see section
\r
13987 \begin_inset space ~
\r
13991 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
13993 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
\r
14003 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
14006 no typewriter text
\r
14009 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
14014 fonts use characters with serifs.
\r
14015 These are the small
\r
14016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14023 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
\r
14024 The following example shows the difference:
\r
14025 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
14029 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
14034 text without serifs
\r
14037 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
14040 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
\r
14041 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
\r
14048 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
14053 is not recommended for use as a base type.
\r
14054 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
\r
14055 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
\r
14058 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14066 refers to applying or removing font properties.
\r
14067 When a property is marked for toggling in the
\r
14070 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14075 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
\r
14076 the property to be removed.
\r
14077 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
\r
14078 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
\r
14079 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
\r
14082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14086 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14097 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
\r
14098 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
\r
14099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14106 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
\r
14110 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14115 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
\r
14118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14125 is never toggled.
\r
14126 If you, for example, set
\r
14127 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14145 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14150 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
\r
14152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14159 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
\r
14162 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14163 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
\r
14164 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
\r
14167 \begin_layout Section
\r
14168 Printing and Previewing
\r
14171 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
14175 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14176 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
\r
14177 using LyX, you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
\r
14178 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
\r
14179 goes on behind-the-scenes.
\r
14180 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
\r
14182 Additional Features
\r
14187 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14188 LyX uses the program LaTeX as its backend.
\r
14189 LaTeX is just a macro package for the TeX typesetting system, but to prevent
\r
14190 confusion, we will only refer to LaTeX.
\r
14191 LyX is what you use to do your actual writing.
\r
14192 Then, LyX calls LaTeX to turn your writing into printable output.
\r
14193 This happens in two stages:
\r
14196 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
14197 First, LyX converts your document to a series of text commands for LaTeX,
\r
14198 generating a file with the extension,
\r
14199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14203 \family typewriter
\r
14207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14213 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
14214 Next, LyX calls LaTeX to use the commands in the
\r
14215 \family typewriter
\r
14218 file to produce printable output.
\r
14221 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
14222 Output file formats
\r
14223 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
14226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14233 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
14234 LatexCommand label
\r
14235 name "sub:Output-file-formats"
\r
14242 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
14243 Simple text (ASCII)
\r
14244 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
14247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14248 File formats ! ASCII
\r
14256 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14257 This file type has the extension
\r
14258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14262 \family typewriter
\r
14266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14270 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
\r
14271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14274 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
\r
14275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14281 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14282 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
\r
14284 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
14285 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
14287 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14293 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
\r
14294 a BibTeX bibliography (section
\r
14295 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
14301 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
\r
14306 If your document includes such material, use
\r
14308 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
14309 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
14311 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14315 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14319 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14327 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14331 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14337 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
\r
14338 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
\r
14341 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
14343 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
14346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14347 File formats ! LaTeX
\r
14355 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14356 This file type has the extension
\r
14357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14361 \family typewriter
\r
14365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14368 and contains all commands that are necessary for the LaTeX program to process
\r
14370 If you know LaTeX, you can use it to find out LaTeX-Errors or to process
\r
14371 it manually with console commands.
\r
14372 The LaTeX-file is automatically created in LyX's temporary directory whenever
\r
14373 you view or export your document.
\r
14376 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14377 You can export your document as a LaTeX-file using the menu
\r
14379 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
14380 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
14385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14395 The different LaTeX export variants are explained in section
\r
14396 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14400 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
14402 reference "sub:Export"
\r
14409 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
14411 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
14414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14415 File formats ! DVI
\r
14423 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14424 This file type has the extension
\r
14425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14429 \family typewriter
\r
14433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14441 device-independent
\r
14442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14445 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
\r
14446 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
\r
14447 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
\r
14451 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14452 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
\r
14453 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
\r
14454 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
\r
14455 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
\r
14456 when you view the DVI.
\r
14457 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
\r
14460 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14461 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
\r
14463 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
14464 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
14469 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
14470 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
14472 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14489 The latter option uses the program
\r
14490 \family typewriter
\r
14495 \family typewriter
\r
14498 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
\r
14499 font access (see section
\r
14500 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
14506 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
\r
14511 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
\r
14512 standard TeX processor.
\r
14515 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
14517 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
14520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14521 File formats ! PostScript
\r
14529 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14530 This file type has the extension
\r
14531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14535 \family typewriter
\r
14539 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14543 PostScript was developed by the company
\r
14544 \family typewriter
\r
14547 as a printer language.
\r
14548 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
\r
14550 PostScript can be seen as a
\r
14551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14554 programming language
\r
14555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14558 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
\r
14559 \begin_inset Foot
\r
14562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14563 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the LaTeX-pack
\r
14569 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
14572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14573 LaTeX-packages ! pstricks
\r
14583 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
\r
14586 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14587 PostScript can only contain images in the format
\r
14588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14591 Encapsulated PostScript
\r
14592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14595 (EPS, file extension
\r
14596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14600 \family typewriter
\r
14604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14608 As LyX allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has
\r
14609 to convert them in the background to EPS.
\r
14610 If, for example, you have 50
\r
14611 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14614 images in your document, LyX has to do 50
\r
14615 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14618 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
\r
14619 This might slow down your workflow with LyX.
\r
14620 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
\r
14621 EPS to avoid this problem.
\r
14624 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14625 You can export to PostScript using the menu
\r
14627 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
14628 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
14634 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
14636 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
14639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14640 File formats ! PDF
\r
14646 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
14649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14658 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14659 This file type has the extension
\r
14660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14664 \family typewriter
\r
14668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14676 Portable Document Format
\r
14677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14680 (PDF) developed by
\r
14681 \family typewriter
\r
14684 was derived from PostScript.
\r
14685 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
\r
14687 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14694 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
\r
14695 looks exactly the same.
\r
14698 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14699 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
\r
14700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14703 Joint Photographic Experts Group
\r
14704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14707 (JPG, file extension
\r
14708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14712 \family typewriter
\r
14716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14724 \family typewriter
\r
14728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14735 Portable Network Graphics
\r
14736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14739 (PNG, file extension
\r
14740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14744 \family typewriter
\r
14748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14752 You can also use any other image format, because LyX converts them in the
\r
14753 background to one of these formats.
\r
14754 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
\r
14755 will slow down your workflow.
\r
14756 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
\r
14759 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14760 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
\r
14762 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
14765 in different ways:
\r
14768 \begin_layout Description
\r
14770 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14773 (pdflatex) This uses the program
\r
14774 \family typewriter
\r
14777 which converts your file directly to PDF.
\r
14780 \begin_layout Description
\r
14782 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14796 X) This uses the program
\r
14797 \family typewriter
\r
14800 which converts your file directly to PDF.
\r
14802 \family typewriter
\r
14805 is a new engine, derived from
\r
14806 \family typewriter
\r
14809 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
\r
14810 access (see section
\r
14811 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
14817 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
\r
14822 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
\r
14823 standard TeX processor.
\r
14826 \begin_layout Description
\r
14828 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14842 X) This uses the program
\r
14843 \family typewriter
\r
14846 that converts your file directly to PDF.
\r
14848 \family typewriter
\r
14851 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
\r
14852 font access (see section
\r
14853 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14857 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
14859 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
\r
14864 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
\r
14865 vertically written Japanese.
\r
14868 \begin_layout Description
\r
14870 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14873 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
\r
14874 \family typewriter
\r
14877 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
\r
14881 \begin_layout Description
\r
14883 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14886 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
\r
14887 \family typewriter
\r
14890 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
\r
14891 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
\r
14892 \family typewriter
\r
14895 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
\r
14896 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
\r
14899 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14900 We recommend using
\r
14903 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14909 \family typewriter
\r
14912 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
\r
14913 works without problems.
\r
14914 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar \slash{}
\r
14915 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
\r
14919 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14938 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14954 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
\r
14956 \family typewriter
\r
14962 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
14964 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
14967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14968 FileFormats ! XHTML
\r
14974 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
14977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14986 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14987 This file type has the extension
\r
14988 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14992 \family typewriter
\r
14996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
15000 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
\r
15001 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
\r
15002 When LyX produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
\r
15003 suitable for the purpose.
\r
15004 For the math output you can choose in the menu
\r
15006 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
15007 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
15010 between different formats, which are described in section
\r
15012 Math Output in XHTML
\r
15017 \begin_inset space ~
\r
15025 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15026 XHTML output remains
\r
15027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
15030 under development
\r
15031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
15034 , and not all LyX features are supported yet.
\r
15037 LyX and the World Wide Web
\r
15041 Additional Features
\r
15043 manual, for more information.
\r
15046 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15047 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
\r
15049 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
15050 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
15056 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
15058 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
15061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15062 Document ! Preview
\r
15070 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15071 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
\r
15072 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
\r
15087 or use the toolbar button
\r
15088 \begin_inset Info
\r
15090 arg "buffer-view"
\r
15094 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
\r
15095 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
\r
15096 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
15100 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
15102 reference "sec:File-Formats"
\r
15106 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
\r
15108 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
15112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
15114 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
\r
15119 Further output formats can be selected via
\r
15121 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
15122 View (Other Formats)
\r
15124 or the toolbar button
\r
15125 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
15126 filename ../images/view-others.png
\r
15128 groupId toolbarbuttons
\r
15135 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15136 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
\r
15137 viewer window using the menu
\r
15139 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
15144 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
15145 Update (Other Formats)
\r
15150 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15151 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in LyX's temporary
\r
15153 To have a real output, export your document.
\r
15156 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
15157 Printing the File from within LyX
\r
15158 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
15159 LatexCommand label
\r
15160 name "sub:Printing-the-File"
\r
15167 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15168 Instead of exporting your file and then printing it, you can also print
\r
15169 it directly from within LyX.
\r
15170 To print a file, select the menu
\r
15172 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
15176 \begin_inset Info
\r
15178 arg "dialog-show print"
\r
15181 ) or click on the toolbar button
\r
15182 \begin_inset Info
\r
15184 arg "dialog-show print"
\r
15188 LyX will internally call LaTeX to produce a DVI.
\r
15189 This file is then processed by the program
\r
15190 \family typewriter
\r
15193 to a PostScript-file, which is finally printed using the program
\r
15194 \family typewriter
\r
15198 Due to these steps in the background, this method is not the fastest.
\r
15201 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15202 You can set the following print parameters in the
\r
15205 \begin_inset space ~
\r
15213 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
15214 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
15219 This is the name of the printer to print to.
\r
15220 \begin_inset Foot
\r
15223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15224 Note that this printer name is for the program
\r
15225 \family typewriter
\r
15230 \family typewriter
\r
15233 has to be configured for this printer name.
\r
15234 The default printer can be set in LyX's preferences dialog, see section
\r
15235 \begin_inset space ~
\r
15239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
15241 reference "sub:Printer"
\r
15250 The printer should understand PostScript.
\r
15253 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
15254 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
15259 The name of a file to print to.
\r
15260 The output will be a PostScript file.
\r
15261 It will be written in LyX's working directory unless you specify the full
\r
15265 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15266 You can choose to print only a range of pages, only even-numbered or only
\r
15267 odd-numbered pages or to print the pages in reverse — the latter options
\r
15268 are useful for printing on two sides with a printer without a duplexer:
\r
15269 you re-insert the pages after printing one set to print on the other side.
\r
15270 Some printers spit out pages face-up, others, face-down.
\r
15271 By choosing a particular order to print in, you can take the entire stack
\r
15272 of pages out of the printer without needing to reorder them.
\r
15275 \begin_layout Section
\r
15276 A few Words about Typography
\r
15277 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
15280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15289 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
15290 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
\r
15291 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
15294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15301 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
15304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15313 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
15319 \family typewriter
\r
15323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
15326 character comes in four lengths: the
\r
15338 , and the minus sign:
\r
15339 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
\r
15345 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15346 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
15347 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
\r
15348 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
15349 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
\r
15350 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
\r
15351 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
\r
15352 <row interlinespace="3mm">
\r
15353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
15354 \begin_inset Text
\r
15356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
15363 \begin_inset Text
\r
15365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
15372 \begin_inset Text
\r
15374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15381 <row interlinespace="3mm">
\r
15382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
15383 \begin_inset Text
\r
15385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
15392 \begin_inset Text
\r
15394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
15401 \begin_inset Text
\r
15403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
15408 \family typewriter
\r
15412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
15421 <row interlinespace="3mm">
\r
15422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
15423 \begin_inset Text
\r
15425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
15432 \begin_inset Text
\r
15434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
15441 \begin_inset Text
\r
15443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15446 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
15448 \begin_inset space ~
\r
15451 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
15458 <row interlinespace="3mm">
\r
15459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
15460 \begin_inset Text
\r
15462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
15469 \begin_inset Text
\r
15471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
15478 \begin_inset Text
\r
15480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15483 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
15485 \begin_inset space ~
\r
15488 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
15496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
15497 \begin_inset Text
\r
15499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
15506 \begin_inset Text
\r
15508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15509 \begin_inset Formula $-$
\r
15517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
15518 \begin_inset Text
\r
15520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
15525 \family typewriter
\r
15529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
15543 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
\r
15549 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15550 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
\r
15551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
15555 \family typewriter
\r
15559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
15562 character multiple times in a row.
\r
15563 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
\r
15564 the final output, but not in LyX.
\r
15566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
15570 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
15574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
15577 gives a en dash,
\r
15578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
15582 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
15586 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
15590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
15596 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15597 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
\r
15598 math mode and has a length of its own.
\r
15599 Here are some examples:
\r
15602 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
15603 line- and page-breaks
\r
15604 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
15614 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
15616 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
15626 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
15627 Oh — there's a dash.
\r
15628 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
15638 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
15639 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
\r
15643 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
15653 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
15655 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
15658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15665 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
15666 LatexCommand label
\r
15667 name "sub:Hyphenation"
\r
15674 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15675 Words are not hyphenated within LyX but automatically in the output.
\r
15676 Hyphenation is done by the LaTeX-package
\r
15681 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
15684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15685 LaTeX-packages ! babel
\r
15690 following the rules of the document language.
\r
15693 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15694 LaTeX hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
\r
15699 font and with unusual constructs, like
\r
15700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
15704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
15708 If LaTeX cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points
\r
15710 This is done with the menu
\r
15712 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
15713 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
15715 \begin_inset space ~
\r
15721 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to LaTeX.
\r
15722 If no hyphenation is necessary, LaTeX will ignore them.
\r
15725 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15726 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
\r
15727 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
\r
15729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
15733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
15737 LaTeX would then see the hyphen
\r
15738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
15742 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
15745 as a hyphenation possibility.
\r
15746 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
\r
15747 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
\r
15748 as described in section
\r
15749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
15752 Prevent Hyphenation
\r
15753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
15759 \begin_inset space ~
\r
15767 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
15768 Punctuation Marks
\r
15769 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
15772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15773 Punctuation marks
\r
15781 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
15782 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
\r
15783 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
15784 LatexCommand label
\r
15785 name "sub:Abbreviations"
\r
15792 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15793 When LyX calls LaTeX to generate the final version of your document, LaTeX
\r
15794 automatically distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
\r
15795 LaTeX then adds the
\r
15796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
15799 appropriate amount of space.
\r
15800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
15803 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
\r
15805 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
\r
15806 gets after another word.
\r
15809 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15810 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
\r
15811 not work in all cases.
\r
15813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
15817 \family typewriter
\r
15821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
15824 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
\r
15825 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
\r
15828 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15829 Here are some examples of
\r
15833 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
\r
15836 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
15841 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
15846 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15847 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
\r
15850 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
15852 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
15856 this is too much space!
\r
15859 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
15864 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15865 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
\r
15868 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15869 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
\r
15872 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
15876 \begin_inset space ~
\r
15881 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
\r
15882 \begin_inset space ~
\r
15886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
15888 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
\r
15893 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
15896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15897 Spaces ! inter-word
\r
15905 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
15909 \begin_inset space ~
\r
15914 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
\r
15915 \begin_inset space ~
\r
15919 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
15921 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
\r
15926 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
15929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15938 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
15942 \begin_inset space ~
\r
15946 \begin_inset space ~
\r
15950 \begin_inset space ~
\r
15957 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
15959 \begin_inset space ~
\r
15964 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
\r
15965 This function is also bound to
\r
15966 \begin_inset Info
\r
15968 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
\r
15974 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15975 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
\r
15978 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
15980 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
15984 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
15987 this is too much space!
\r
15990 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
15991 This is I\SpecialChar \@.
\r
15995 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15996 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
\r
15997 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because LaTeX
\r
15998 will take care of this.
\r
16001 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16002 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
\r
16006 \begin_inset space ~
\r
16011 feature described in the section
\r
16017 Additional Features
\r
16022 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
16024 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
16027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16028 Typography ! Quotes
\r
16034 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
16037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16068 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16069 LyX usually sets quotes correctly.
\r
16070 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
\r
16071 and use a closing quote at the end.
\r
16073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16077 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16081 The keyboard character,
\r
16085 , generates this automatically.
\r
16088 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16089 You can specify what character the
\r
16093 key produces using the submenu
\r
16099 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
16103 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
16106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16107 Document ! Settings
\r
16112 dialog in the box
\r
16117 There are six choices:
\r
16120 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
16121 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
16124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16144 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
16145 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
16148 \begin_inset Quotes sld
\r
16152 \begin_inset Quotes srd
\r
16158 \begin_inset Quotes sld
\r
16162 \begin_inset Quotes srd
\r
16168 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
16169 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
16172 \begin_inset Quotes gld
\r
16176 \begin_inset Quotes grd
\r
16182 \begin_inset Quotes gld
\r
16186 \begin_inset Quotes grd
\r
16192 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
16193 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
16196 \begin_inset Quotes pld
\r
16200 \begin_inset Quotes prd
\r
16206 \begin_inset Quotes pld
\r
16210 \begin_inset Quotes prd
\r
16216 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
16217 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
16220 \begin_inset Quotes fld
\r
16224 \begin_inset Quotes frd
\r
16230 \begin_inset Quotes fld
\r
16234 \begin_inset Quotes frd
\r
16240 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
16241 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
16244 \begin_inset Quotes ald
\r
16248 \begin_inset Quotes ard
\r
16254 \begin_inset Quotes ald
\r
16258 \begin_inset Quotes ard
\r
16264 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16265 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
\r
16266 \begin_inset Info
\r
16268 arg "quote-insert single"
\r
16274 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
16276 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
16279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16280 Typography ! Ligatures
\r
16286 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
16289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16318 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
16319 LatexCommand label
\r
16320 name "sub:Ligatures"
\r
16327 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16328 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
\r
16329 print them as single characters.
\r
16330 These groups are known as
\r
16335 Since LaTeX knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too
\r
16337 Here are the standard ligatures:
\r
16340 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
16344 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
16348 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
16352 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
16356 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
16360 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16361 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
\r
16364 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16365 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
\r
16366 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
\r
16367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16374 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
\r
16375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16390 To break a ligature, use
\r
16392 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
16393 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
16395 \begin_inset space ~
\r
16402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16413 cuff\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
\r
16415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16430 Dorf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
\r
16432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16438 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
16439 LyX's Proper Names
\r
16440 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
16443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16444 LyX ! Proper names
\r
16450 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
16451 LatexCommand label
\r
16452 name "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
\r
16459 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16460 You will certainly have noticed that the word “LaTeX” always appears with
\r
16461 characters in different sizes and heights.
\r
16462 LaTeX is the name of the program used by LyX and is therefore recognized
\r
16463 as a proper name when you type it in LyX as
\r
16464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16483 \begin_inset Note Note
\r
16486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16487 The braces in TeX Code are here to avoid that the
\r
16488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16495 appear as proper name in the output, see the last paragraph of this section.
\r
16496 To create proper names omit the TeX Code.
\r
16501 Note the order of the upper- and lowercase letters! LyX recognizes the
\r
16502 following proper names:
\r
16505 \begin_layout Description
\r
16506 LyX The name of the game, write
\r
16507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16528 \begin_layout Description
\r
16529 TeX The program used by LaTeX, write
\r
16530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16551 \begin_layout Description
\r
16552 LaTeX The program used by LyX, write
\r
16553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16574 \begin_layout Description
\r
16575 LaTeX2e The actual version of LaTeX, write
\r
16576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16597 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16598 You might wonder why the LaTeX-version is
\r
16599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16603 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
\r
16607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16611 It is an old tradition in the TeX-world to give programs geek version numbers.
\r
16612 For example the version number of TeX converges to the number
\r
16613 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
\r
16616 : The actual version is
\r
16617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16624 , the previous one was
\r
16625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16635 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16636 If you don't want to use proper names, for example, in section headings,
\r
16637 you can insert two empty braces in TeX Code in the word.
\r
16638 In LyX this will look like
\r
16639 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
16640 filename clipart/LaTeX.png
\r
16646 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
16649 For more about TeX Code, see section
\r
16650 \begin_inset space ~
\r
16654 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
16656 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
\r
16663 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
16665 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
16668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16669 Typography ! Units
\r
16677 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16678 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
\r
16679 space between two words.
\r
16680 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
\r
16683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16690 for units use the menu
\r
16692 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
16693 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
16695 \begin_inset space ~
\r
16701 \begin_inset Info
\r
16703 arg "space-insert thin"
\r
16709 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16710 Here is an example to show the differences:
\r
16713 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16714 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
16715 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
\r
16716 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
16717 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
\r
16718 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
\r
16720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
16721 \begin_inset Text
\r
16723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16725 \begin_inset space ~
\r
16729 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
\r
16737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
16738 \begin_inset Text
\r
16740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16741 space between number and unit
\r
16748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
16749 \begin_inset Text
\r
16751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16753 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
16757 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
\r
16765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
16766 \begin_inset Text
\r
16768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16769 half space between number and unit
\r
16782 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
16783 Widows and Orphans
\r
16784 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
16787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16788 Typography ! Widows and orphans
\r
16796 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16797 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
\r
16799 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
\r
16800 You may remember once printing out a document, only to find the heading
\r
16801 for a new section printed at the very bottom of the page, the first line
\r
16802 of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom of a page, or the last line
\r
16803 of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
\r
16804 These bits of text became known as
\r
16815 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16816 Clearly, LyX can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
\r
16817 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
\r
16818 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
\r
16819 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
\r
16820 built into LaTeX governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there
\r
16821 specifically to prevent widows and orphans.
\r
16822 This is the advantage LyX has in using LaTeX as its backend.
\r
16825 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16826 We cannot go into how TeX and LaTeX decide to break a page, or how you can
\r
16827 tweak that behavior.
\r
16828 Some LaTeX books listed in the bibliography (such as
\r
16829 \begin_inset space ~
\r
16833 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
16834 LatexCommand cite
\r
16835 key "latexcompanion"
\r
16840 \begin_inset space ~
\r
16844 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
16845 LatexCommand cite
\r
16850 ) may have more information.
\r
16851 You will almost never need to worry about this, however.
\r
16854 \begin_layout Chapter
\r
16855 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
\r
16856 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
16857 LatexCommand label
\r
16858 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
\r
16865 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16866 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
\r
16869 \begin_inset space ~
\r
16875 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
\r
16878 \begin_layout Section
\r
16880 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
16883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16890 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
16891 LatexCommand label
\r
16899 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16900 LyX offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
\r
16903 \begin_layout Description
\r
16905 \begin_inset space ~
\r
16908 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
\r
16909 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
16913 \begin_inset Note Note
\r
16916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16917 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
\r
16925 \begin_layout Description
\r
16926 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
\r
16927 a LaTeX-comment when you export the document to LaTeX via the menu
\r
16929 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
16930 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
16935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16943 \begin_inset space ~
\r
16949 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
16953 \begin_inset Note Comment
\r
16956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16957 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in LaTeX-files.
\r
16965 \begin_layout Description
\r
16967 \begin_inset space ~
\r
16970 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
\r
16971 set in the document settings under
\r
16973 Colors\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
16975 \begin_inset space ~
\r
16981 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
16985 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
16989 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
16992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16994 \begin_inset Foot
\r
16997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16998 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
\r
16999 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
\r
17004 of a comment that appears in the output.
\r
17010 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
17014 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
17017 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
\r
17020 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17021 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
\r
17022 \begin_inset Info
\r
17024 arg "note-insert"
\r
17029 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
17033 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
\r
17036 \begin_layout Section
\r
17038 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
17041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17048 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
17049 LatexCommand label
\r
17050 name "sec:Footnotes"
\r
17057 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17058 LyX uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the
\r
17061 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
17064 or the toolbar button
\r
17065 \begin_inset Info
\r
17067 arg "footnote-insert"
\r
17078 a box like this:
\r
17079 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
17080 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
\r
17089 This box is LyX's representation of your footnote.
\r
17099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17118 label, the box will
\r
17122 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
\r
17123 Clicking on the box label again will close
\r
17136 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
\r
17137 and click on the footnote
\r
17152 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17153 Here is an example footnote:
\r
17158 \begin_inset Foot
\r
17161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17162 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
\r
17170 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17171 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
\r
17172 position where the footnote box is placed.
\r
17173 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
\r
17174 The footnote number is calculated by LyX according to the document class.
\r
17175 LyX does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get
\r
17176 other schemes using special LaTeX-commands.
\r
17181 ey are described in the
\r
17184 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17192 \begin_layout Section
\r
17194 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
17197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17204 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
17205 LatexCommand label
\r
17206 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
\r
17213 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17214 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in LyX.
\r
17215 When you insert a margin note via the menu
\r
17217 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
17219 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17224 or the toolbar button
\r
17225 \begin_inset Info
\r
17227 arg "marginalnote-insert"
\r
17246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17253 appearing within your text.
\r
17254 This box is LyX's representation of your margin
\r
17263 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17264 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
\r
17268 \begin_inset Marginal
\r
17271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17273 This is a marginal note.
\r
17281 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17282 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
\r
17283 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
\r
17284 pages, right on odd pages.
\r
17287 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17288 For further information about marginal notes see the section
\r
17291 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17299 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17307 \begin_layout Section
\r
17308 Graphics and Images
\r
17309 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
17312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17319 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
17322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17329 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
17330 LatexCommand label
\r
17331 name "sec:Graphics"
\r
17338 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17339 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
\r
17340 you want and click on the toolbar icon
\r
17341 \begin_inset Info
\r
17343 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
\r
17348 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
17352 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
\r
17355 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17356 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
\r
17364 tab allows you to choose your image file.
\r
17365 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
\r
17367 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
\r
17368 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17372 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
17374 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
\r
17381 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17386 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
\r
17387 of the image in the output.
\r
17388 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
\r
17392 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17396 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17405 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17409 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17413 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17418 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
\r
17419 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
\r
17427 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17442 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17446 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17462 tab LaTeX experts can specify additional LaTeX options.
\r
17463 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside LyX.
\r
17467 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17472 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
\r
17473 with the image size is printed.
\r
17477 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17481 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17485 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17490 is explained in the
\r
17493 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17498 manual in section
\r
17505 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17506 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
\r
17507 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
\r
17509 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
\r
17512 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17514 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
17515 filename clipart/mobius.eps
\r
17523 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17524 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
\r
17525 the image into a float, see section
\r
17526 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17530 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
17532 reference "sub:Figure-Floats"
\r
17539 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
17541 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
17544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17551 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
17552 LatexCommand label
\r
17553 name "sub:Image-Formats"
\r
17560 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17561 You can insert images in any known file format.
\r
17562 But as we explained in section
\r
17563 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17567 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
17569 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
\r
17573 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
\r
17574 LyX therefore uses the program
\r
17575 \family typewriter
\r
17578 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
\r
17579 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
\r
17580 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
\r
17581 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17585 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
17587 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
\r
17594 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17595 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
\r
17598 \begin_layout Description
\r
17600 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17603 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
\r
17604 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
\r
17605 Well-known bitmap image formats are
\r
17606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17609 Graphics Interchange Format
\r
17610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17613 (GIF, file extension
\r
17614 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17618 \family typewriter
\r
17622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17626 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
17629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17661 Portable Network Graphics
\r
17662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17665 (PNG, file extension
\r
17666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17670 \family typewriter
\r
17674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17678 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
17681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17713 Joint Photographic Experts Group
\r
17714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17717 (JPG, file extension
\r
17718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17722 \family typewriter
\r
17726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17734 \family typewriter
\r
17738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17742 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
17745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17776 \begin_layout Description
\r
17778 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17781 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
\r
17783 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
\r
17784 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
\r
17785 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
\r
17786 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
17789 Scalable image formats can be
\r
17790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17793 Scalable Vector Graphics
\r
17794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17797 (SVG, file extension
\r
17798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17802 \family typewriter
\r
17806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17810 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
17813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17842 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17845 Encapsulated PostScript
\r
17846 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17849 (EPS, file extension
\r
17850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17854 \family typewriter
\r
17858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17862 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
17865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17897 Portable Document Format
\r
17898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17901 (PDF, file extension
\r
17902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17906 \family typewriter
\r
17910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17914 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
17917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17932 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
\r
17933 result will not be scalable.
\r
17934 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
\r
17936 \begin_inset Foot
\r
17939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17940 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
\r
17948 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17949 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
\r
17956 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
17957 Grouping of Image Settings
\r
17958 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
17961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17962 Images ! Settings grouping
\r
17970 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17971 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
\r
17973 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
\r
17974 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
\r
17976 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
\r
17977 need to manually change each of them.
\r
17981 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17982 A new group can be set by pressing the button
\r
17985 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17989 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18012 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18016 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18033 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
\r
18034 and checking the name of the desired group.
\r
18037 \begin_layout Section
\r
18039 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
18042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18049 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
18050 LatexCommand label
\r
18051 name "sec:Tables"
\r
18058 \begin_layout Standard
\r
18059 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
\r
18060 \begin_inset Info
\r
18062 arg "tabular-insert"
\r
18067 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
18071 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
\r
18072 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
\r
18073 from the rest of the table.
\r
18074 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
\r
18075 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
\r
18077 Here is an example table:
\r
18080 \begin_layout Standard
\r
18082 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
18083 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
\r
18084 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
18085 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
18086 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
18087 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
\r
18088 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
18090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18091 \begin_inset Text
\r
18093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18100 \begin_inset Text
\r
18102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18118 \begin_inset Text
\r
18120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18127 \begin_inset Text
\r
18129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18138 \begin_inset Text
\r
18140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18156 \begin_inset Text
\r
18158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18165 \begin_inset Text
\r
18167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18174 \begin_inset Text
\r
18176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18185 \begin_inset Text
\r
18187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18203 \begin_inset Text
\r
18205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18212 \begin_inset Text
\r
18214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18225 \begin_inset Text
\r
18227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18236 \begin_inset Text
\r
18238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18254 \begin_inset Text
\r
18256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18263 \begin_inset Text
\r
18265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18272 \begin_inset Text
\r
18274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18288 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
18292 \begin_layout Standard
\r
18293 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
\r
18296 More\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
18300 This brings up the table dialog.
\r
18301 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
\r
18302 cursor is placed currently.
\r
18303 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
\r
18304 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
\r
18305 done on all of your selection.
\r
18308 \begin_layout Standard
\r
18309 In addition to the table dialog, the
\r
18312 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18317 helps you in setting table properties.
\r
18318 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
\r
18321 \begin_layout Standard
\r
18325 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18330 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
\r
18331 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
\r
18332 current cell respectively.
\r
18333 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
\r
18335 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
\r
18336 of text, see section
\r
18337 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18341 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
18343 reference "sub:Table-Cells"
\r
18350 \begin_layout Standard
\r
18351 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
\r
18352 using the check box
\r
18361 This will merge the cells to
\r
18365 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
\r
18366 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
\r
18367 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
\r
18368 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
\r
18369 in the last row without the upper border:
\r
18372 \begin_layout Standard
\r
18374 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
18375 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
\r
18376 <features rotate="0" firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
18377 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
18378 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="0">
\r
18379 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
\r
18380 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
18382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18383 \begin_inset Text
\r
18385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18391 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18392 \begin_inset Text
\r
18394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18400 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18401 \begin_inset Text
\r
18403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18410 \begin_inset Text
\r
18412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18421 \begin_inset Text
\r
18423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18439 \begin_inset Text
\r
18441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18448 \begin_inset Text
\r
18450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18457 \begin_inset Text
\r
18459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18468 \begin_inset Text
\r
18470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18476 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18477 \begin_inset Text
\r
18479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18486 \begin_inset Text
\r
18488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18495 \begin_inset Text
\r
18497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18511 \begin_layout Standard
\r
18512 Adept users can declare special LaTeX-arguments for the table.
\r
18513 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
\r
18514 explained in the chapter
\r
18521 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18527 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table 90
\r
18528 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
18531 degrees counterclockwise.
\r
18532 These rotations are not visible in LyX but are visible in the output.
\r
18535 \begin_layout Standard
\r
18536 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
18539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18544 Most DVI-viewers are
\r
18548 able to display rotations.
\r
18556 \begin_layout Standard
\r
18561 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
\r
18566 adds lines for all cell borders.
\r
18569 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
18571 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
18574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18575 Tables ! Longtables
\r
18581 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
18584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18593 \begin_layout Standard
\r
18594 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
\r
18597 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18601 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18610 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
\r
18611 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
\r
18614 \begin_layout Description
\r
18619 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
\r
18620 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
\r
18621 except for the first page, if
\r
18624 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18632 \begin_layout Description
\r
18636 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18641 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
\r
18642 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
\r
18645 \begin_layout Description
\r
18650 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
\r
18651 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
\r
18652 except for the last page, if
\r
18655 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18663 \begin_layout Description
\r
18667 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18672 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
\r
18673 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
\r
18676 \begin_layout Description
\r
18677 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
\r
18678 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
\r
18680 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
18684 More about longtable captions can be found in the
\r
18687 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18695 \begin_layout Standard
\r
18696 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
\r
18697 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
\r
18698 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
\r
18704 In this context, first means first in this order:
\r
18707 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18719 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18724 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
\r
18727 \begin_layout Standard
\r
18729 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
18730 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
\r
18731 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
\r
18732 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
\r
18733 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
18734 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
18735 <row endfirsthead="true">
\r
18736 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18737 \begin_inset Text
\r
18739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18742 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
\r
18747 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18748 \begin_inset Text
\r
18750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18756 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18757 \begin_inset Text
\r
18759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18766 <row endfirsthead="true">
\r
18767 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18768 \begin_inset Text
\r
18770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18778 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18779 \begin_inset Text
\r
18781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18787 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18788 \begin_inset Text
\r
18790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18799 <row endhead="true">
\r
18800 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18801 \begin_inset Text
\r
18803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18806 Example Phone List
\r
18811 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18812 \begin_inset Text
\r
18814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18820 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18821 \begin_inset Text
\r
18823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18830 <row endhead="true">
\r
18831 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18832 \begin_inset Text
\r
18834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18842 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18843 \begin_inset Text
\r
18845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18851 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18852 \begin_inset Text
\r
18854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18863 <row endfoot="true">
\r
18864 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18865 \begin_inset Text
\r
18867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18875 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18876 \begin_inset Text
\r
18878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18884 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18885 \begin_inset Text
\r
18887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18896 \begin_inset Text
\r
18898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18907 \begin_inset Text
\r
18909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18915 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18916 \begin_inset Text
\r
18918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18927 \begin_inset Text
\r
18929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18938 \begin_inset Text
\r
18940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18947 \begin_inset Text
\r
18949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18958 \begin_inset Text
\r
18960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18969 \begin_inset Text
\r
18971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18978 \begin_inset Text
\r
18980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18989 \begin_inset Text
\r
18991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19000 \begin_inset Text
\r
19002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19009 \begin_inset Text
\r
19011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19020 \begin_inset Text
\r
19022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19031 \begin_inset Text
\r
19033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19040 \begin_inset Text
\r
19042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19051 \begin_inset Text
\r
19053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19062 \begin_inset Text
\r
19064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19071 \begin_inset Text
\r
19073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19082 \begin_inset Text
\r
19084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19093 \begin_inset Text
\r
19095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19102 \begin_inset Text
\r
19104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19113 \begin_inset Text
\r
19115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19124 \begin_inset Text
\r
19126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19133 \begin_inset Text
\r
19135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19144 \begin_inset Text
\r
19146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19155 \begin_inset Text
\r
19157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19164 \begin_inset Text
\r
19166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19175 \begin_inset Text
\r
19177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19186 \begin_inset Text
\r
19188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19195 \begin_inset Text
\r
19197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19206 \begin_inset Text
\r
19208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19217 \begin_inset Text
\r
19219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19226 \begin_inset Text
\r
19228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19237 \begin_inset Text
\r
19239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19248 \begin_inset Text
\r
19250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19257 \begin_inset Text
\r
19259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19268 \begin_inset Text
\r
19270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19279 \begin_inset Text
\r
19281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19288 \begin_inset Text
\r
19290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19299 \begin_inset Text
\r
19301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19310 \begin_inset Text
\r
19312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19319 \begin_inset Text
\r
19321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19330 \begin_inset Text
\r
19332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19341 \begin_inset Text
\r
19343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19350 \begin_inset Text
\r
19352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19361 \begin_inset Text
\r
19363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19372 \begin_inset Text
\r
19374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19381 \begin_inset Text
\r
19383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19392 \begin_inset Text
\r
19394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19403 \begin_inset Text
\r
19405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19412 \begin_inset Text
\r
19414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19423 \begin_inset Text
\r
19425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19434 \begin_inset Text
\r
19436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19443 \begin_inset Text
\r
19445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19454 \begin_inset Text
\r
19456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19465 \begin_inset Text
\r
19467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19474 \begin_inset Text
\r
19476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19485 \begin_inset Text
\r
19487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19496 \begin_inset Text
\r
19498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19505 \begin_inset Text
\r
19507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19516 \begin_inset Text
\r
19518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19527 \begin_inset Text
\r
19529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19536 \begin_inset Text
\r
19538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19547 \begin_inset Text
\r
19549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19558 \begin_inset Text
\r
19560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19567 \begin_inset Text
\r
19569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19578 \begin_inset Text
\r
19580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19589 \begin_inset Text
\r
19591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19598 \begin_inset Text
\r
19600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19609 \begin_inset Text
\r
19611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19620 \begin_inset Text
\r
19622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19629 \begin_inset Text
\r
19631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19640 \begin_inset Text
\r
19642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19651 \begin_inset Text
\r
19653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19660 \begin_inset Text
\r
19662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19671 \begin_inset Text
\r
19673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19682 \begin_inset Text
\r
19684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19691 \begin_inset Text
\r
19693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19702 \begin_inset Text
\r
19704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19713 \begin_inset Text
\r
19715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19722 \begin_inset Text
\r
19724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19733 \begin_inset Text
\r
19735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19744 \begin_inset Text
\r
19746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19753 \begin_inset Text
\r
19755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19764 \begin_inset Text
\r
19766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19775 \begin_inset Text
\r
19777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19784 \begin_inset Text
\r
19786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19795 \begin_inset Text
\r
19797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19806 \begin_inset Text
\r
19808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19815 \begin_inset Text
\r
19817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19826 \begin_inset Text
\r
19828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19837 \begin_inset Text
\r
19839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19846 \begin_inset Text
\r
19848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19856 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19857 \begin_inset Text
\r
19859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19865 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19866 \begin_inset Text
\r
19868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19874 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19875 \begin_inset Text
\r
19877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19885 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19886 \begin_inset Text
\r
19888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19897 \begin_inset Text
\r
19899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19906 \begin_inset Text
\r
19908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19916 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19917 \begin_inset Text
\r
19919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19928 \begin_inset Text
\r
19930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19937 \begin_inset Text
\r
19939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19947 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19948 \begin_inset Text
\r
19950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19959 \begin_inset Text
\r
19961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19968 \begin_inset Text
\r
19970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19978 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19979 \begin_inset Text
\r
19981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19990 \begin_inset Text
\r
19992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19999 \begin_inset Text
\r
20001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20009 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20010 \begin_inset Text
\r
20012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20021 \begin_inset Text
\r
20023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20030 \begin_inset Text
\r
20032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20040 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20041 \begin_inset Text
\r
20043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20052 \begin_inset Text
\r
20054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20061 \begin_inset Text
\r
20063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20071 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20072 \begin_inset Text
\r
20074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20083 \begin_inset Text
\r
20085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20092 \begin_inset Text
\r
20094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20102 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20103 \begin_inset Text
\r
20105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20114 \begin_inset Text
\r
20116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20123 \begin_inset Text
\r
20125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20133 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20134 \begin_inset Text
\r
20136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20145 \begin_inset Text
\r
20147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20154 \begin_inset Text
\r
20156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20164 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20165 \begin_inset Text
\r
20167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20176 \begin_inset Text
\r
20178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20185 \begin_inset Text
\r
20187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20195 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20196 \begin_inset Text
\r
20198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20207 \begin_inset Text
\r
20209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20216 \begin_inset Text
\r
20218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20226 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20227 \begin_inset Text
\r
20229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20238 \begin_inset Text
\r
20240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20247 \begin_inset Text
\r
20249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20257 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20258 \begin_inset Text
\r
20260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20269 \begin_inset Text
\r
20271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20278 \begin_inset Text
\r
20280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20288 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20289 \begin_inset Text
\r
20291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20300 \begin_inset Text
\r
20302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20309 \begin_inset Text
\r
20311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20319 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20320 \begin_inset Text
\r
20322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20331 \begin_inset Text
\r
20333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20340 \begin_inset Text
\r
20342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20350 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20351 \begin_inset Text
\r
20353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20362 \begin_inset Text
\r
20364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20371 \begin_inset Text
\r
20373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20381 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20382 \begin_inset Text
\r
20384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20393 \begin_inset Text
\r
20395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20402 \begin_inset Text
\r
20404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20412 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20413 \begin_inset Text
\r
20415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20424 \begin_inset Text
\r
20426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20433 \begin_inset Text
\r
20435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20443 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20444 \begin_inset Text
\r
20446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20455 \begin_inset Text
\r
20457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20464 \begin_inset Text
\r
20466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20474 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20475 \begin_inset Text
\r
20477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20486 \begin_inset Text
\r
20488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20495 \begin_inset Text
\r
20497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20505 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20506 \begin_inset Text
\r
20508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20517 \begin_inset Text
\r
20519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20526 \begin_inset Text
\r
20528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20536 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20537 \begin_inset Text
\r
20539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20548 \begin_inset Text
\r
20550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20557 \begin_inset Text
\r
20559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20567 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20568 \begin_inset Text
\r
20570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20579 \begin_inset Text
\r
20581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20588 \begin_inset Text
\r
20590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20598 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20599 \begin_inset Text
\r
20601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20610 \begin_inset Text
\r
20612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20619 \begin_inset Text
\r
20621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20629 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20630 \begin_inset Text
\r
20632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20641 \begin_inset Text
\r
20643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20650 \begin_inset Text
\r
20652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20660 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20661 \begin_inset Text
\r
20663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20672 \begin_inset Text
\r
20674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20681 \begin_inset Text
\r
20683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20691 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20692 \begin_inset Text
\r
20694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20703 \begin_inset Text
\r
20705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20712 \begin_inset Text
\r
20714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20722 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20723 \begin_inset Text
\r
20725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20734 \begin_inset Text
\r
20736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20743 \begin_inset Text
\r
20745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20753 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20754 \begin_inset Text
\r
20756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20765 \begin_inset Text
\r
20767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20774 \begin_inset Text
\r
20776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20784 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20785 \begin_inset Text
\r
20787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20796 \begin_inset Text
\r
20798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20805 \begin_inset Text
\r
20807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20815 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20816 \begin_inset Text
\r
20818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20827 \begin_inset Text
\r
20829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20836 \begin_inset Text
\r
20838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20845 <row endlastfoot="true">
\r
20846 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20847 \begin_inset Text
\r
20849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20857 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20858 \begin_inset Text
\r
20860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20866 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20867 \begin_inset Text
\r
20869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20883 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
20885 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
20888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20895 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
20896 LatexCommand label
\r
20897 name "sub:Table-Cells"
\r
20904 \begin_layout Standard
\r
20905 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
\r
20906 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
\r
20907 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
\r
20908 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
\r
20912 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
\r
20915 \begin_layout Standard
\r
20916 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
\r
20917 for the column in the table dialog.
\r
20918 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
\r
20919 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
\r
20923 \begin_layout Standard
\r
20925 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
20926 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
\r
20927 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
20928 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
20929 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
\r
20930 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
20932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20933 \begin_inset Text
\r
20935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20950 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20951 \begin_inset Text
\r
20953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20969 \begin_inset Text
\r
20971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20989 \begin_inset Text
\r
20991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21007 \begin_inset Text
\r
21009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21019 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
\r
21024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21025 \begin_inset Text
\r
21027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21045 \begin_inset Text
\r
21047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21063 \begin_inset Text
\r
21065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21075 This is longer now.
\r
21080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21081 \begin_inset Text
\r
21083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21101 \begin_inset Text
\r
21103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21119 \begin_inset Text
\r
21121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21131 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
\r
21132 This is longer now.
\r
21137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21138 \begin_inset Text
\r
21140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21163 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21164 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
\r
21165 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
\r
21166 \begin_inset Foot
\r
21169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21170 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
\r
21171 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
\r
21177 Selection with the mouse or with
\r
21181 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
\r
21182 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
\r
21183 the selection from outside the table.
\r
21186 \begin_layout Section
\r
21188 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
21191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21198 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
21199 LatexCommand label
\r
21200 name "sec:Floats"
\r
21207 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
21211 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21212 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
\r
21213 have a fixed location.
\r
21215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
21219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
21222 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
\r
21230 \begin_inset space ~
\r
21235 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
\r
21236 too many notes on the current page.
\r
21239 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21240 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
\r
21241 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
\r
21242 and pages without text.
\r
21243 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
\r
21244 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
\r
21245 Floats are therefore numbered.
\r
21246 Referencing is described in section
\r
21247 \begin_inset space ~
\r
21251 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
21253 reference "sec:Cross-References"
\r
21260 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21261 To insert a float, use the menu
\r
21263 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
21267 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
\r
21268 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
\r
21270 After the label you can insert the caption text.
\r
21271 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
21274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21275 Floats ! Captions
\r
21280 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
\r
21281 paragraph within the float.
\r
21282 To keep your LyX-document readable, you can open and close the float box
\r
21283 by left-clicking on the box label.
\r
21284 A closed float box looks like this:
\r
21285 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
21286 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
\r
21291 – a gray button with a red label.
\r
21294 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21295 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible LaTeX-errors
\r
21296 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
\r
21299 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
21303 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
21305 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
21306 LatexCommand label
\r
21307 name "sub:Figure-Floats"
\r
21312 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
21315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21316 Floats ! Figure floats
\r
21324 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21326 \begin_inset space ~
\r
21330 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
21332 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
\r
21336 was created using the menu
\r
21338 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
21339 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
21343 \begin_inset Info
\r
21345 arg "float-insert figure"
\r
21349 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
\r
21352 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
21356 \begin_inset Info
\r
21358 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
\r
21362 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
\r
21363 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
\r
21365 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
21367 \begin_inset space ~
\r
21373 \begin_inset Info
\r
21375 arg "layout-paragraph"
\r
21381 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21382 \begin_inset Float figure
\r
21387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21389 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
21390 filename clipart/platypus.eps
\r
21399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21400 \begin_inset Caption Standard
\r
21402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21403 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
21404 LatexCommand label
\r
21405 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
\r
21409 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
\r
21422 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21423 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
\r
21424 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
\r
21426 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
21430 \begin_inset Info
\r
21432 arg "label-insert"
\r
21435 ) and refer to it using the menu
\r
21437 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
21441 \begin_inset Info
\r
21443 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
\r
21447 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
\r
21448 vague references like
\r
21449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
21453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
21456 , because, as LaTeX will reposition the floats in the final document, it
\r
21458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
21462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
21466 For more about cross-references, see section
\r
21467 \begin_inset space ~
\r
21471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
21473 reference "sec:Cross-References"
\r
21480 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21481 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
\r
21482 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
\r
21483 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
\r
21484 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
\r
21485 as described in section
\r
21486 \begin_inset space ~
\r
21490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
21492 reference "sub:List-of-Figures"
\r
21498 \begin_inset space ~
\r
21502 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
21504 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
\r
21508 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
\r
21509 You can also set the images one below the other.
\r
21511 \begin_inset space ~
\r
21515 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
21517 reference "fig:Undefinable"
\r
21522 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
21524 reference "fig:Platypus"
\r
21528 are the subfigures.
\r
21531 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21532 \begin_inset Float figure
\r
21537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21538 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
21542 \begin_inset Float figure
\r
21547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21548 \begin_inset Caption Standard
\r
21550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21551 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
21552 LatexCommand label
\r
21553 name "fig:Undefinable"
\r
21565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21566 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
21567 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
\r
21578 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
21582 \begin_inset Float figure
\r
21587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21588 \begin_inset Caption Standard
\r
21590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21591 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
21592 LatexCommand label
\r
21593 name "fig:Platypus"
\r
21605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21606 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
21607 filename clipart/platypus.eps
\r
21619 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
21625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21626 \begin_inset Caption Standard
\r
21628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21629 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
21630 LatexCommand label
\r
21631 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
\r
21635 Two distorted images.
\r
21648 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
21650 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
21653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21654 Floats ! Table floats
\r
21662 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21663 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
\r
21665 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
21666 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
21669 or the toolbar button
\r
21670 \begin_inset Info
\r
21672 arg "float-insert table"
\r
21676 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
\r
21677 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
\r
21678 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
\r
21680 \begin_inset space ~
\r
21684 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
21686 reference "tab:Table-float"
\r
21690 is a table float.
\r
21693 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21694 \begin_inset Float table
\r
21699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21700 \begin_inset Caption Standard
\r
21702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21703 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
21704 LatexCommand label
\r
21705 name "tab:Table-float"
\r
21717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21719 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
21720 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
\r
21721 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
21722 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
21723 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
21724 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
21726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21727 \begin_inset Text
\r
21729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21745 \begin_inset Text
\r
21747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21763 \begin_inset Text
\r
21765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21783 \begin_inset Text
\r
21785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21801 \begin_inset Text
\r
21803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21819 \begin_inset Text
\r
21821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21839 \begin_inset Text
\r
21841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21851 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
\r
21859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21860 \begin_inset Text
\r
21862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21872 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
\r
21875 \end{array}\right]$
\r
21883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21884 \begin_inset Text
\r
21886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21896 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
\r
21917 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
21919 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
21922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21931 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21932 LyX offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
\r
21933 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
\r
21934 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
\r
21936 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
\r
21944 \begin_inset space ~
\r
21952 \begin_layout Section
\r
21954 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
21957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21964 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
21965 LatexCommand label
\r
21966 name "sec:Minipages"
\r
21973 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21974 LaTeX provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page,
\r
21975 called a minipage.
\r
21976 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
\r
21977 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
21984 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21985 Minipages in LyX have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
\r
21987 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
21991 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
\r
21992 and its alignment within the page.
\r
21995 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21997 \begin_inset Box Frameless
\r
22007 height_special "totalheight"
\r
22010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22013 This is a minipage.
\r
22014 The text is set in an italic style.
\r
22017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22020 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
\r
22021 another formatting.
\r
22029 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22030 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
\r
22033 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
\r
22037 as described in section
\r
22038 \begin_inset space ~
\r
22042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
22044 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
\r
22049 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
\r
22055 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22056 \begin_inset Box Frameless
\r
22066 height_special "totalheight"
\r
22069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22070 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
\r
22071 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
\r
22077 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
22081 \begin_inset Box Frameless
\r
22091 height_special "totalheight"
\r
22094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22095 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
\r
22096 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
\r
22104 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22105 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
\r
22111 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22112 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
\r
22114 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
\r
22121 \begin_inset space ~
\r
22129 \begin_layout Chapter
\r
22130 Mathematical Formulas
\r
22131 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
22134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22141 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
22144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22173 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
22174 LatexCommand label
\r
22175 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
\r
22182 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22183 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
\r
22188 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
\r
22191 \begin_layout Section
\r
22192 Basic Math Editing
\r
22193 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
22196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22205 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22206 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
\r
22207 \begin_inset Info
\r
22209 arg "math-mode on"
\r
22213 \begin_inset Info
\r
22219 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
\r
22221 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
\r
22222 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
\r
22223 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
\r
22225 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
22231 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22232 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
\r
22236 \begin_inset space ~
\r
22241 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
\r
22244 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22245 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
\r
22246 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
\r
22249 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22250 This is a line with an inline formula
\r
22251 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
\r
22257 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22258 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
\r
22259 paragraph, like this one:
\r
22260 \begin_inset Formula
\r
22267 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
\r
22270 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22271 LyX also supports many LaTeX math commands.
\r
22272 For example, typing
\r
22273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
22283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
22286 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
\r
22287 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
\r
22291 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
\r
22294 \begin_inset space ~
\r
22302 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
22303 Navigating in Formulas
\r
22304 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
22307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22308 Math ! Navigating
\r
22316 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22317 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
\r
22318 achieved with the arrow keys.
\r
22319 LyX uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
\r
22320 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
\r
22325 will leave a formula construct (a square root
\r
22326 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
\r
22329 , or parentheses
\r
22330 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
\r
22334 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
\r
22337 \end{array}\right]$
\r
22345 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
\r
22350 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
\r
22351 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
\r
22354 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22359 , printed in this document as
\r
22360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
22367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
22381 \begin_inset Note Note
\r
22384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22385 This command will appear in the output as an official character denoting
\r
22386 the space character (visible space).
\r
22391 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
\r
22392 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
\r
22393 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
\r
22398 For example, if you want
\r
22399 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
\r
22410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22453 , since in the latter case only the
\r
22454 \family typewriter
\r
22456 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
\r
22461 will be under the square root sign:
\r
22462 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
\r
22468 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22469 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
\r
22471 \begin_inset Formula
\r
22473 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
\r
22477 \end{array}\right)
\r
22482 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
\r
22483 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
\r
22486 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
22490 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22491 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
\r
22492 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
\r
22496 and a cursor movement key to select text.
\r
22497 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
\r
22498 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
\r
22499 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
\r
22500 but not in a normal text region in LyX.
\r
22503 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
22504 Exponents and Subscripts
\r
22505 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
22508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22515 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
22518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22519 Math ! Subscripts
\r
22527 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22528 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
\r
22529 \begin_inset Info
\r
22531 arg "math-superscript"
\r
22535 \begin_inset Info
\r
22537 arg "math-subscript"
\r
22540 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
\r
22542 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
\r
22545 , type in a formula
\r
22551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22567 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
\r
22573 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
\r
22577 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
\r
22586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22598 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
\r
22600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
22604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
22607 , you have to use an extra
\r
22611 to separate the circumflex and the character.
\r
22612 For example, if you want
\r
22613 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
\r
22622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22634 Subscripts are similar: To get
\r
22635 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
\r
22644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22658 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
22660 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
22663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22672 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22673 Create a fraction either with the command
\r
22679 or by using the icon
\r
22680 \begin_inset Info
\r
22682 arg "math-insert \\frac"
\r
22688 \begin_inset space ~
\r
22694 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
\r
22695 The cursor is above the fraction line.
\r
22696 To move it to the bottom, simply press
\r
22701 To move back up, press
\r
22706 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
\r
22707 \begin_inset Formula
\r
22709 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
\r
22712 \end{array}\right)}\right]
\r
22720 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
22722 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
22725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22734 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22735 Roots can be created using the
\r
22738 \begin_inset space ~
\r
22744 \begin_inset Info
\r
22746 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
\r
22750 \begin_inset Info
\r
22752 arg "math-insert \\root"
\r
22768 With the command
\r
22774 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
\r
22780 always produces a square root.
\r
22783 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
22784 Operators with Limits
\r
22785 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
22788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22795 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
22798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22805 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
22806 LatexCommand label
\r
22807 name "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
\r
22814 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22816 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
\r
22820 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
\r
22823 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
\r
22824 These limits can be entered in LyX by entering them as you would enter
\r
22825 a super- or subscript, directly after the symbol.
\r
22826 The sum operator will automatically place its
\r
22827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
22831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
22834 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
\r
22836 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
\r
22840 \begin_inset Formula
\r
22842 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
\r
22847 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
\r
22851 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22852 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
\r
22854 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
\r
22855 behind the operator and using the menu
\r
22857 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
22858 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
22860 \begin_inset space ~
\r
22864 \begin_inset space ~
\r
22870 \begin_inset Info
\r
22872 arg "math-limits"
\r
22878 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22879 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
\r
22880 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
22884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
22888 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
22891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22898 \begin_inset Formula
\r
22900 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
\r
22905 which will place the
\r
22906 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
\r
22910 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
22914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
22918 In inline formulas it looks like this:
\r
22919 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
\r
22925 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22926 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
\r
22933 Have a look at section
\r
22934 \begin_inset space ~
\r
22938 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
22940 reference "sub:Functions"
\r
22944 for an explanation of function macros.
\r
22947 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
22949 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
22952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22961 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22962 Most math symbols can be found in the
\r
22965 \begin_inset space ~
\r
22970 under one of several categories; including
\r
22987 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
\r
22991 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22992 If you know the LaTeX-command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
\r
22993 you don't have to use the
\r
22996 \begin_inset space ~
\r
23001 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
\r
23002 LyX will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
\r
23005 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
23007 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
23010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23019 \begin_layout Standard
\r
23020 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
\r
23022 To do this, press
\r
23023 \begin_inset Info
\r
23025 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
\r
23031 \begin_inset space ~
\r
23039 \begin_inset Info
\r
23041 arg "math-insert \\space"
\r
23047 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
\r
23048 For example, the sequence
\r
23053 \begin_inset Formula $a\, b$
\r
23056 appears in LyX as
\r
23057 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
23058 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
\r
23063 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
\r
23064 the space marker and enter space again several times.
\r
23065 With every space enter the size will be changed.
\r
23066 Some markers for the space size appear red in LyX, because they are negative
\r
23068 Here are two examples:
\r
23071 \begin_layout Standard
\r
23081 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
\r
23087 \begin_layout Standard
\r
23097 \begin_inset Formula $a\! b$
\r
23103 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
23105 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
23108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23115 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
23116 LatexCommand label
\r
23117 name "sub:Functions"
\r
23124 \begin_layout Standard
\r
23128 \begin_inset space ~
\r
23133 contains under the button
\r
23136 \begin_inset Info
\r
23138 arg "math-insert \\functions"
\r
23143 a number of function macros, such as
\r
23144 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
\r
23148 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
\r
23156 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
\r
23163 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
\r
23164 avoid confusions, because
\r
23165 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
\r
23168 does normally mean
\r
23169 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
\r
23175 \begin_layout Standard
\r
23176 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
\r
23178 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
\r
23181 is different from
\r
23182 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
\r
23188 \begin_layout Standard
\r
23189 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
\r
23190 are placed, as described in section
\r
23191 \begin_inset space ~
\r
23195 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
23197 reference "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
\r
23204 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
23206 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
23209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23218 \begin_layout Standard
\r
23219 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
\r
23221 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
\r
23222 You can also use LaTeX commands, for example, to enter
\r
23223 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
\r
23226 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
\r
23227 Our example is entered by typing
\r
23235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23248 \begin_inset space ~
\r
23252 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
23254 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
\r
23258 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
\r
23261 \begin_layout Standard
\r
23262 \begin_inset Float table
\r
23267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23268 \begin_inset Caption Standard
\r
23270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23271 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
23272 LatexCommand label
\r
23273 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
\r
23277 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
\r
23285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23287 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
23288 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
\r
23289 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
23290 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
23291 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
23292 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
23294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23295 \begin_inset Text
\r
23297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23304 \begin_inset Text
\r
23306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23313 \begin_inset Text
\r
23315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23333 \begin_inset Text
\r
23335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23351 \begin_inset Text
\r
23353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23364 \begin_inset Text
\r
23366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23376 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
\r
23386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23387 \begin_inset Text
\r
23389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23405 \begin_inset Text
\r
23407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23418 \begin_inset Text
\r
23420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23430 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
\r
23440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23441 \begin_inset Text
\r
23443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23459 \begin_inset Text
\r
23461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23472 \begin_inset Text
\r
23474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23484 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
\r
23494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23495 \begin_inset Text
\r
23497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23513 \begin_inset Text
\r
23515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23526 \begin_inset Text
\r
23528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23538 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
\r
23548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23549 \begin_inset Text
\r
23551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23567 \begin_inset Text
\r
23569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23580 \begin_inset Text
\r
23582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23592 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
\r
23602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23603 \begin_inset Text
\r
23605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23621 \begin_inset Text
\r
23623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23634 \begin_inset Text
\r
23636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23646 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
\r
23656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23657 \begin_inset Text
\r
23659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23675 \begin_inset Text
\r
23677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23688 \begin_inset Text
\r
23690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23700 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
\r
23710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23711 \begin_inset Text
\r
23713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23729 \begin_inset Text
\r
23731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23742 \begin_inset Text
\r
23744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23754 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
\r
23764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23765 \begin_inset Text
\r
23767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23783 \begin_inset Text
\r
23785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23796 \begin_inset Text
\r
23798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23808 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
\r
23818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23819 \begin_inset Text
\r
23821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23828 \begin_inset Text
\r
23830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23841 \begin_inset Text
\r
23843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23853 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
\r
23874 \begin_layout Standard
\r
23875 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
\r
23878 \begin_inset space ~
\r
23883 symbol set button
\r
23884 \begin_inset Info
\r
23886 arg "math-insert \\hat"
\r
23889 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
\r
23893 \begin_layout Section
\r
23894 Brackets and Delimiters
\r
23895 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
23898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23905 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
23908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23909 Math ! Delimiters
\r
23915 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
23916 LatexCommand label
\r
23917 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
\r
23924 \begin_layout Standard
\r
23925 There are several brackets available through LyX.
\r
23926 For some purposes, using just the keys
\r
23927 \family typewriter
\r
23931 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
\r
23932 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
\r
23933 toolbar delimiter icon
\r
23934 \begin_inset Info
\r
23936 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
\r
23940 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
\r
23941 \begin_inset Formula
\r
23943 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
\r
23946 \end{array}\right]
\r
23951 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
\r
23952 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
\r
23954 \begin_inset Info
\r
23956 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
\r
23959 and the expression on the right was entered using the
\r
23960 \family typewriter
\r
23965 \begin_inset Formula
\r
23967 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
\r
23975 \begin_layout Standard
\r
23976 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
\r
23977 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
\r
23981 \begin_layout Standard
\r
23982 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
\r
23983 left side and right side.
\r
23984 If you use the option
\r
23987 \begin_inset space ~
\r
23992 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
\r
23993 The selection will be shown below the button field.
\r
23994 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use the blank button.
\r
23995 It will appear in LyX with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
\r
23998 \begin_layout Standard
\r
23999 If you want to place brackets around math structures, like a square root,
\r
24000 you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that is to
\r
24001 go inside the brackets.
\r
24002 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
\r
24007 The parentheses will be drawn around the selected structure.
\r
24008 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
\r
24009 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
\r
24010 For example, to insert a pair of flexible parentheses on both sides, select
\r
24011 the structure and enter
\r
24012 \begin_inset Info
\r
24014 arg "math-delim ( )"
\r
24020 \begin_layout Section
\r
24021 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
\r
24022 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
24025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24032 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
24035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24042 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
24045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24046 Math ! Multi-line Equations
\r
24054 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24055 Matrices are entered in LyX using the
\r
24058 \begin_inset space ~
\r
24066 \begin_inset Info
\r
24068 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
\r
24074 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
\r
24075 Here is an example:
\r
24076 \begin_inset Formula
\r
24078 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
\r
24082 \end{array}\right)
\r
24087 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
\r
24088 \begin_inset space ~
\r
24092 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
24094 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
\r
24099 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
\r
24100 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
\r
24101 This alignment is set in the box
\r
24105 with the letters
\r
24106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
24114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
24118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
24126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
24130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
24138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
24143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
24151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
24154 for every column as default.
\r
24155 For example, the sequence
\r
24156 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
24164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
24167 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
\r
24168 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
\r
24169 corresponds to the relevant column.
\r
24170 The result will look like this:
\r
24171 \begin_inset Formula
\r
24173 \begin{array}{lcr}
\r
24174 this & this\, column & this\, column\\
\r
24175 column & has & has\, right\\
\r
24176 has\, left\, alignment & center\, alignment & alignment
\r
24185 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24186 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
\r
24187 \begin_inset Info
\r
24189 arg "newline-insert newline"
\r
24192 while the cursor is in the matrix.
\r
24193 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
\r
24195 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
24198 or the math toolbar.
\r
24201 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24202 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
\r
24203 It can be created with the menu
\r
24205 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
24206 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
24208 \begin_inset space ~
\r
24220 Here is an example:
\r
24221 \begin_inset Formula
\r
24223 f(x)=\begin{cases}
\r
24235 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24236 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
\r
24239 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
\r
24240 \begin_inset Info
\r
24242 arg "newline-insert newline"
\r
24245 within a formula.
\r
24246 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
\r
24249 \begin_inset Info
\r
24251 arg "newline-insert newline"
\r
24254 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
\r
24255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
24259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
24262 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
\r
24263 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
\r
24264 A new row is created by every further entry of
\r
24265 \begin_inset Info
\r
24267 arg "newline-insert newline"
\r
24271 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
\r
24272 Here is an example:
\r
24273 \begin_inset Formula
\r
24275 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
\r
24276 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
\r
24281 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
\r
24282 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
\r
24283 \begin_inset Formula
\r
24284 \begin{eqnarray*}
\r
24285 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
\r
24293 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24294 The multi-line formula type described here is called
\r
24295 \family typewriter
\r
24301 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
\r
24302 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
\r
24303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
24304 LatexCommand eqref
\r
24305 reference "eq:asquared"
\r
24310 The other types are described in section
\r
24311 \begin_inset space ~
\r
24315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
24317 reference "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
\r
24324 \begin_layout Section
\r
24325 Formula Numbering and Referencing
\r
24326 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
24329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24330 Math ! Formula numbering
\r
24336 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
24339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24340 Math ! Referencing formulas
\r
24346 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
24347 LatexCommand label
\r
24348 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
\r
24355 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24356 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
\r
24358 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
24359 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
24361 \begin_inset space ~
\r
24365 \begin_inset space ~
\r
24371 \begin_inset Info
\r
24373 arg "math-number-toggle"
\r
24377 The formula number appears in LyX within parentheses.
\r
24378 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
\r
24379 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
\r
24380 the document class.
\r
24381 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
\r
24382 separated by a dot:
\r
24383 \begin_inset Formula
\r
24391 \begin_inset Info
\r
24393 arg "math-number-toggle"
\r
24396 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
\r
24397 You can only number displayed formulas.
\r
24400 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24401 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
\r
24403 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
24404 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
24406 \begin_inset space ~
\r
24410 \begin_inset space ~
\r
24416 \begin_inset Info
\r
24418 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
\r
24421 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
\r
24422 \begin_inset Formula
\r
24425 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
\r
24431 To number all lines use the shortcut
\r
24432 \begin_inset Info
\r
24434 arg "math-number-toggle"
\r
24440 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24441 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
\r
24444 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
\r
24445 A label is inserted with the menu
\r
24447 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
24451 \begin_inset Info
\r
24453 arg "label-insert"
\r
24456 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
\r
24457 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
\r
24458 It is recommended that you use the suggested
\r
24459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
24467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
24470 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
\r
24471 label type when you have many labels in your document.
\r
24472 We inserted in the following example the label
\r
24473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
24477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
24480 in the second line:
\r
24481 \begin_inset Formula
\r
24483 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
\r
24484 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
\r
24489 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
\r
24490 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
\r
24491 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
\r
24493 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
24495 \begin_inset space ~
\r
24501 \begin_inset Info
\r
24503 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
\r
24507 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
\r
24508 The reference appears in LyX as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
\r
24509 as the formula number:
\r
24512 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24513 This is a cross-reference to equation (
\r
24514 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
24516 reference "eq:tanhExp"
\r
24523 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24524 The properties of LyX's cross-reference box are described in section
\r
24525 \begin_inset space ~
\r
24529 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
24531 reference "sec:Cross-References"
\r
24536 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
\r
24544 \begin_layout Section
\r
24545 User defined math macros
\r
24546 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
24549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24558 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24559 LyX allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
\r
24560 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
\r
24561 Math macros are explained in section
\r
24564 \begin_inset space ~
\r
24576 \begin_layout Section
\r
24580 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
24582 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
24585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24594 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24595 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
\r
24596 To set a font in a formula, use the
\r
24599 \begin_inset space ~
\r
24607 \begin_inset Info
\r
24609 arg "math-insert \\font"
\r
24614 , or enter its command, listed in table
\r
24615 \begin_inset space ~
\r
24619 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
24621 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
\r
24628 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24629 \begin_inset Float table
\r
24634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24635 \begin_inset Caption Standard
\r
24637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24638 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
24639 LatexCommand label
\r
24640 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
\r
24644 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
\r
24652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24654 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
24655 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
\r
24656 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
24657 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
24658 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
24660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24661 \begin_inset Text
\r
24663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24670 \begin_inset Text
\r
24672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24681 \begin_inset Text
\r
24683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24690 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
\r
24698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24699 \begin_inset Text
\r
24701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24714 \begin_inset Text
\r
24716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24717 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
\r
24725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24726 \begin_inset Text
\r
24728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24741 \begin_inset Text
\r
24743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24744 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
\r
24752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24753 \begin_inset Text
\r
24755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24768 \begin_inset Text
\r
24770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24777 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
\r
24785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24786 \begin_inset Text
\r
24788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24801 \begin_inset Text
\r
24803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24804 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
\r
24812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24813 \begin_inset Text
\r
24815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24828 \begin_inset Text
\r
24830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24831 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
\r
24839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24840 \begin_inset Text
\r
24842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24855 \begin_inset Text
\r
24857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24865 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
\r
24873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24874 \begin_inset Text
\r
24876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24889 \begin_inset Text
\r
24891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24892 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
\r
24900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24901 \begin_inset Text
\r
24903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24926 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24927 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
24930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24935 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
\r
24951 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24952 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
\r
24953 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
\r
24958 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
\r
24959 space when you need a space in the box.
\r
24960 Here is an example where
\r
24961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
24965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
24972 denotes the set of numbers:
\r
24973 \begin_inset Formula
\r
24975 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\: x\in\mathbb{N}
\r
24983 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24984 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
\r
24985 You can, for example, put a character in
\r
24994 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
\r
24998 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
25001 So it is better not to use this feature.
\r
25004 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25005 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
\r
25006 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
\r
25010 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
25013 You can only print them emboldened using the command
\r
25019 , which works like the other typeface commands:
\r
25020 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
\r
25026 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25033 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
\r
25036 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25037 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
\r
25039 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
25040 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
25042 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25050 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
25052 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
25055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
25064 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25065 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
\r
25067 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
\r
25071 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25075 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25083 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25091 \begin_inset Info
\r
25093 arg "math-insert \\font"
\r
25099 \begin_inset Info
\r
25101 arg "font-default"
\r
25105 Math text appears in LyX in black instead of blue.
\r
25106 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
\r
25107 Here is an example:
\r
25108 \begin_inset Formula
\r
25110 f(x)=\begin{cases}
\r
25111 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
\r
25112 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
\r
25121 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
25123 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
25126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
25127 Math ! Font sizes
\r
25135 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25136 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
\r
25137 automatically chosen in most situations.
\r
25138 These are called
\r
25152 scriptscriptstyle
\r
25155 For most characters,
\r
25163 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
\r
25164 and certain other structures, are set larger in
\r
25169 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
\r
25170 situations, all text will be set in the styles that LaTeX thinks are appropriat
\r
25172 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
\r
25175 \begin_inset Info
\r
25177 arg "math-insert \\style"
\r
25183 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
\r
25184 For example, you can set
\r
25185 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
\r
25188 , which is normally in
\r
25197 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
\r
25201 The four styles are used in the following example:
\r
25204 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25205 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
\r
25209 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
\r
25213 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
\r
25217 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
\r
25223 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25224 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
\r
25225 is set in a particular size with the menu
\r
25227 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
25229 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25234 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
\r
25235 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
\r
25236 will be adjusted to correspond.
\r
25237 As an example here is a formula in the font size
\r
25238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
25242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
25248 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25252 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
\r
25258 \begin_layout Section
\r
25260 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
25263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
25270 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
25273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
25282 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25283 LyX supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society
\r
25284 (AMS) that are in common use.
\r
25287 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
25288 Enabling AMS-Support
\r
25291 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25292 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
\r
25293 the document by selecting the checkbox
\r
25296 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25300 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25304 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25311 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
25315 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
25318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
25319 Document ! Settings
\r
25327 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25333 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get LaTeX-errors in
\r
25334 formulas, ensure that you have enabled AMS.
\r
25337 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
25338 AMS-Formula Types
\r
25339 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
25340 LatexCommand label
\r
25341 name "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
\r
25346 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
25349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
25350 Math ! Multi-line Equations
\r
25358 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25359 AMS-LaTeX provides a selection of different formula types.
\r
25360 LyX allows you to choose between
\r
25361 \family typewriter
\r
25365 \family typewriter
\r
25369 \family typewriter
\r
25373 \family typewriter
\r
25377 \family typewriter
\r
25381 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
\r
25382 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
25383 LatexCommand cite
\r
25388 , for an explanation of these formula types.
\r
25391 \begin_layout Chapter
\r
25395 \begin_layout Section
\r
25397 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
25400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
25407 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
25408 LatexCommand label
\r
25409 name "sec:Cross-References"
\r
25416 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25417 One of LyX's strengths is cross-references.
\r
25418 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
\r
25420 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
\r
25421 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
\r
25422 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
\r
25425 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
25429 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
25430 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
25431 LatexCommand label
\r
25432 name "enu:Second-item"
\r
25439 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
25443 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25444 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
\r
25446 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
25449 or by pressing the toolbar button
\r
25450 \begin_inset Info
\r
25452 arg "label-insert"
\r
25456 A gray label box like this:
\r
25457 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
25458 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
\r
25463 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
\r
25464 LyX offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
\r
25466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
25474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
25479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
25487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
25491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
25495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
25499 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
\r
25500 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
\r
25502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
25510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
25516 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25517 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
\r
25519 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
25522 or the toolbar button
\r
25523 \begin_inset Info
\r
25525 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
\r
25529 A gray cross-reference box like this:
\r
25530 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
25531 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
\r
25536 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
\r
25538 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
\r
25539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
25547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
25551 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
\r
25555 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25556 As an alternative to
\r
25558 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
25561 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
\r
25563 Copy as Reference
\r
25566 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
\r
25567 to the actual cursor position via the menu
\r
25569 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
25573 \begin_inset Info
\r
25581 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25582 Here is our cross-reference: Item
\r
25583 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25587 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
25589 reference "enu:Second-item"
\r
25596 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25597 It is recommended to use a protected space
\r
25598 \begin_inset Foot
\r
25601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
25602 described in section
\r
25603 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25607 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
25609 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
\r
25618 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
\r
25619 line breaks between them.
\r
25622 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25623 There are six formats of cross-references:
\r
25626 \begin_layout Description
\r
25627 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
\r
25628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
25630 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
\r
25637 \begin_layout Description
\r
25638 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
\r
25639 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
\r
25641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
25645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
25649 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
25650 LatexCommand eqref
\r
25651 reference "eq:tanhExp"
\r
25658 \begin_layout Description
\r
25659 <page>: prints the page number: Page
\r
25660 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25664 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
25665 LatexCommand pageref
\r
25666 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
\r
25673 \begin_layout Description
\r
25675 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25679 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25682 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
\r
25683 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
25684 LatexCommand vpageref
\r
25685 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
\r
25690 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
25693 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
\r
25694 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
\r
25695 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
\r
25696 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
\r
25697 it prints “on the next page”.
\r
25698 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
\r
25701 \begin_layout Description
\r
25703 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25707 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25711 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25714 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
\r
25715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
25716 LatexCommand vref
\r
25717 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
\r
25722 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
25725 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
\r
25731 ; otherwise it behaves like
\r
25735 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25739 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25748 \begin_layout Description
\r
25750 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25753 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
\r
25754 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
25758 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
25761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
25766 This feature is only available when you have the LaTeX-package
\r
25775 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
25778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
25779 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
\r
25785 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
25788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
25789 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
\r
25800 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
25803 You can select which LaTeX-package should be used for this feature by setting
\r
25806 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
\r
25810 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
25811 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
25819 is the default and preferred because
\r
25823 supports only English documents.
\r
25824 The format is specified by using the command
\r
25836 (refstyle) in the LaTeX preamble of the document.
\r
25837 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
\r
25839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
25847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
25850 ) can be done with this command
\r
25851 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
25858 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
\r
25863 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
25866 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
\r
25868 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
25869 LatexCommand cite
\r
25870 key "prettyref,refstyle"
\r
25877 \begin_layout Description
\r
25879 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25882 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
\r
25883 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
25884 LatexCommand nameref
\r
25885 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
\r
25892 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25893 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
\r
25894 is automatically calculated by LaTeX.
\r
25895 The varieties are adjusted in the field
\r
25899 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
\r
25903 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25904 You can only use the style
\r
25908 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
\r
25912 is always possible.
\r
25915 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25916 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
\r
25917 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
\r
25919 Referencing formulas is explained in section
\r
25920 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
25926 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
\r
25933 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25934 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
\r
25938 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25942 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25947 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
\r
25948 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
\r
25951 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25956 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
\r
25957 You can also go back with the toolbar button
\r
25958 \begin_inset Info
\r
25960 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
\r
25966 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25967 You can change labels at any time.
\r
25968 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
\r
25969 do not need to think about this.
\r
25972 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25973 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in LyX
\r
25974 “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output
\r
25975 instead of the reference.
\r
25978 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25979 References are described in detail in the section
\r
25980 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25984 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
25987 Referencing Floats
\r
25988 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
25994 \begin_inset space ~
\r
26002 \begin_layout Section
\r
26003 Table of Contents and other Listings
\r
26004 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
26007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26008 Table of contents
\r
26014 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
26017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26024 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
26025 LatexCommand label
\r
26033 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
26034 Table of Contents
\r
26035 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
26036 LatexCommand label
\r
26037 name "sub:Table-of-Contents"
\r
26044 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26045 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
\r
26047 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26048 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26050 \begin_inset space ~
\r
26054 \begin_inset space ~
\r
26060 It is displayed in LyX as a gray box.
\r
26061 If you click on it, the
\r
26065 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
\r
26066 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
\r
26067 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
\r
26069 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26072 that is described in sec.
\r
26073 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
26077 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
26079 reference "sub:The-Outliner"
\r
26086 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26087 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
\r
26088 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
\r
26090 \begin_inset space ~
\r
26094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
26096 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
\r
26100 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
\r
26102 \begin_inset space ~
\r
26106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
26108 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
\r
26112 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
\r
26113 listed in the TOC.
\r
26114 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
\r
26117 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
26118 List of Figures, Tables, and Algorithms
\r
26119 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
26120 LatexCommand label
\r
26121 name "sub:List-of-Figures"
\r
26128 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26129 Table, figure, and algorithm lists are very much like the table of contents.
\r
26130 You can insert them via the
\r
26132 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26136 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
\r
26139 \begin_layout Section
\r
26140 URLs and Hyperlinks
\r
26141 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
26144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26151 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
26154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26163 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
26165 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
26166 LatexCommand label
\r
26174 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26175 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
\r
26177 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26183 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26184 Here is an example URL: LyX's homepage:
\r
26185 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
26188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26190 http://www.lyx.org
\r
26198 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26199 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
\r
26201 \family typewriter
\r
26205 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
\r
26209 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26210 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
26213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26218 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get LaTeX errors.
\r
26226 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
26228 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
26229 LatexCommand label
\r
26230 name "sub:Hyperlinks"
\r
26237 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26238 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
\r
26240 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26243 or with the toolbar button
\r
26244 \begin_inset Info
\r
26246 arg "href-insert"
\r
26250 The appearing dialog has two fields:
\r
26259 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
\r
26260 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
\r
26261 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
26262 LatexCommand href
\r
26263 name "LyX's homepage"
\r
26264 target "http://www.lyx.org"
\r
26268 , an Email address like this:
\r
26269 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
26270 LatexCommand href
\r
26271 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
\r
26272 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
\r
26277 , or a link to a file.
\r
26280 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26281 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
\r
26282 adding the prefix
\r
26283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
26291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
26294 to the link target.
\r
26297 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26298 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
\r
26299 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
\r
26300 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
\r
26301 the text style dialog.
\r
26302 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
\r
26306 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
26307 LatexCommand href
\r
26308 name "LyX's homepage"
\r
26309 target "http://www.lyx.org"
\r
26316 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26317 The link text color can be changed, when the option
\r
26321 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
\r
26323 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26324 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26328 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
\r
26330 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
26338 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
26343 Additional options
\r
26345 in the PDF Properties dialog.
\r
26348 \begin_layout Section
\r
26350 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
26353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26360 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
26361 LatexCommand label
\r
26362 name "sec:Appendices"
\r
26369 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26370 Appendices are created with the menu
\r
26372 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26374 \begin_inset space ~
\r
26378 \begin_inset space ~
\r
26384 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
\r
26385 as the appendix part of the book.
\r
26386 This part is marked with a red borderline.
\r
26389 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26390 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
\r
26391 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
\r
26392 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
\r
26393 and the subsection number.
\r
26394 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
\r
26395 here two examples:
\r
26398 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26400 \begin_inset space ~
\r
26404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
26406 reference "chap:Credits"
\r
26411 \begin_inset space ~
\r
26415 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
26417 reference "sub:Export"
\r
26424 \begin_layout Section
\r
26426 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
26429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26436 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
26437 LatexCommand label
\r
26438 name "sec:Bibliography"
\r
26445 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26446 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a LyX-document.
\r
26447 You can include a bibliography database,
\r
26448 \begin_inset Foot
\r
26451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26452 Known under the name
\r
26453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
26457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
26465 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
\r
26466 manually, using the paragraph environment
\r
26470 , which was described in section
\r
26471 \begin_inset space ~
\r
26475 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
26477 reference "sub:Biblio_environment"
\r
26482 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
\r
26483 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
\r
26487 use a bibliography database.
\r
26490 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
26491 The Bibliography Environment
\r
26494 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26499 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
\r
26501 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
\r
26510 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
\r
26512 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about LaTeX
\r
26514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
26518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
26521 , a short form of its title, as the key.
\r
26524 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26525 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
\r
26527 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26530 or the toolbar button
\r
26531 \begin_inset Info
\r
26533 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
\r
26537 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
\r
26538 containing the available citations.
\r
26539 Select one or more keys from the list and
\r
26549 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
\r
26550 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
\r
26554 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26555 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
\r
26556 entry with surrounding brackets.
\r
26561 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
\r
26562 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
\r
26564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
26568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
26574 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26575 Have a look at the
\r
26577 LaTeX Companion Second Edition
\r
26580 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
26581 LatexCommand cite
\r
26582 key "latexcompanion"
\r
26589 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26590 The LyX-Team members are listed in the Credits:
\r
26591 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
26592 LatexCommand cite
\r
26600 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26601 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
\r
26602 label via the menu
\r
26604 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26606 \begin_inset space ~
\r
26612 \begin_inset Info
\r
26614 arg "layout-paragraph"
\r
26618 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
\r
26621 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
26622 Bibliography databases (BibTeX)
\r
26623 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
26626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26627 Bibliography ! Databases
\r
26633 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
26636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26637 Bibliography ! BibTeX
\r
26643 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
26644 LatexCommand label
\r
26645 name "sub:Bibliography-databases"
\r
26652 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26653 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
\r
26655 \begin_inset Foot
\r
26658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26659 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
\r
26661 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
\r
26662 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
\r
26667 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
\r
26669 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
\r
26670 your working field in a database.
\r
26671 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
\r
26672 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
\r
26673 list for that document.
\r
26674 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
\r
26678 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26679 The database is a text file with the file extension
\r
26680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
26688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
26691 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
\r
26692 The format is explained in
\r
26693 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
26694 LatexCommand cite
\r
26699 and in the LaTeX books (
\r
26700 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
26701 LatexCommand cite
\r
26702 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
\r
26707 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
\r
26708 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
\r
26709 A list of such programs is maintained on the LyX Wiki at
\r
26710 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
26713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26715 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
\r
26723 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26724 To use a database, use the menu
\r
26726 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26731 TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26744 \begin_inset space ~
\r
26750 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
\r
26751 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
\r
26758 Add bibliography to TOC
\r
26760 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
\r
26765 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
\r
26766 in the document or just the cited references.
\r
26769 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26770 The style file is a text file with the file extension
\r
26771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
26779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
26782 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
\r
26783 Your LaTeX distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
\r
26784 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
\r
26786 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
\r
26788 \begin_inset Foot
\r
26791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26792 For information on how this is done, have a look at
\r
26793 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
26797 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
26798 LatexCommand href
\r
26799 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
\r
26811 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26812 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
\r
26815 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26816 To generate the bibliography from a database, LyX uses the program BibTeX.
\r
26817 You can choose which of its variants should be used by LyX as the
\r
26823 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26824 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26829 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26830 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26831 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26846 The following variants are possible:
\r
26849 \begin_layout Description
\r
26850 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
\r
26851 with other bibliography packages (e.
\r
26852 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
26856 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
26863 ), only with the package
\r
26867 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
\r
26871 \begin_layout Description
\r
26872 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
\r
26873 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
\r
26874 with all bibliography packages, except
\r
26879 \begin_layout Description
\r
26880 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
\r
26881 larger memory than
\r
26885 , works with all bibliography packages
\r
26888 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26889 BibTeX can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
\r
26891 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
\r
26897 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
26898 LatexCommand cite
\r
26906 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26907 When you select the option
\r
26909 Sectioned bibliography
\r
26913 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26914 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26917 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
\r
26918 This and other options are explained in detail in section
\r
26920 Customizing Bibliographies
\r
26928 Additional Features
\r
26933 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26934 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
\r
26935 the two methods of creating them.
\r
26936 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
\r
26937 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
\r
26938 We used the style file
\r
26942 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
\r
26945 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
26946 Bibliography layout
\r
26947 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
26950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26951 Bibliography ! Layout
\r
26959 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26960 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
\r
26961 For this feature you need to enable the option
\r
26967 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26971 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
26974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26975 Document ! Settings
\r
26985 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
\r
26986 For the global citation format use the BibTeX style files as explained
\r
26987 in the previous section.
\r
26990 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26991 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
\r
26992 the citation reference window.
\r
26993 Here is an example where the text
\r
26994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
26998 \begin_inset space ~
\r
27002 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27005 appears after the reference:
\r
27008 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27010 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
27011 LatexCommand cite
\r
27012 after "Chapter 3"
\r
27013 key "latexcompanion"
\r
27020 \begin_layout Section
\r
27022 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
27025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27032 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
27033 LatexCommand label
\r
27041 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27042 An index entry is created if you use the menu
\r
27044 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
27046 \begin_inset space ~
\r
27051 or the toolbar button
\r
27052 \begin_inset Info
\r
27054 arg "index-insert"
\r
27058 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
\r
27059 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
\r
27060 by LyX as the index entry.
\r
27063 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27064 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
\r
27066 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
27067 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
27069 \begin_inset space ~
\r
27075 A light blue box labeled
\r
27076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27087 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
\r
27088 The index list box is not clickable like other LyX-boxes.
\r
27091 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27092 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
\r
27093 For a detailed description of LaTeX's index mechanism, have a look at one
\r
27094 of the LaTeX books
\r
27095 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
27096 LatexCommand cite
\r
27097 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
\r
27104 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
27105 Grouping Index Entries
\r
27106 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
27109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27118 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27119 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
\r
27121 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
\r
27122 lists under the entry
\r
27123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27131 First we create the entry
\r
27132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27140 \begin_inset space ~
\r
27144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
27146 reference "sub:Lists"
\r
27151 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
\r
27152 \begin_inset space ~
\r
27156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
27158 reference "sec:Itemize"
\r
27162 , we insert the command
\r
27165 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27171 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27175 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27178 Lists ! Enumerate
\r
27181 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27182 for the enumerated list in section
\r
27183 \begin_inset space ~
\r
27187 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
27189 reference "sec:Enumerate"
\r
27196 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27197 The exclamation mark
\r
27198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27202 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27205 marks the grouping levels.
\r
27206 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
\r
27207 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
\r
27208 If we don't have an index entry for
\r
27209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27213 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27216 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
\r
27219 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
27221 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
27224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27225 Index ! Page ranges
\r
27233 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27234 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
\r
27236 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
\r
27237 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
\r
27238 an index entry in section
\r
27239 \begin_inset space ~
\r
27243 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
27245 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
\r
27252 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27255 Paragraph environments|(
\r
27258 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27259 and another entry at the end of section
\r
27260 \begin_inset space ~
\r
27264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
27266 reference "sub:LyX-Code"
\r
27273 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27276 Paragraph environments|)
\r
27279 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27304 respectively start and end the index range.
\r
27305 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
\r
27306 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
\r
27307 the pages of the indexed document parts.
\r
27308 An example is the index entry
\r
27309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27312 Document ! Settings
\r
27313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27319 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
27320 Cross referencing
\r
27321 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
27324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27325 Index ! Cross referencing
\r
27333 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27334 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
\r
27335 We referred for example in the index entry
\r
27336 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27344 \begin_inset space ~
\r
27348 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
27350 reference "sub:Image-Formats"
\r
27354 ) to the index entry
\r
27355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27362 in the same section using the entry
\r
27365 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27368 GIF|see{Image formats}
\r
27371 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27372 where the braces have to be inserted as TeX Code.
\r
27373 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
\r
27374 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
\r
27377 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
27378 Index Entry Order
\r
27379 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
27382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27383 Index ! Entry order
\r
27391 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27392 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
\r
27393 follow the rules for the index order.
\r
27394 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but LaTeX
\r
27395 \begin_inset Foot
\r
27398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27399 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
\r
27401 \begin_inset space ~
\r
27405 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
27407 reference "sub:Index-Program"
\r
27416 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
\r
27417 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
\r
27418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27426 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27434 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27438 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27442 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
27445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27446 Dummy entries ! maïs
\r
27452 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
27455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27456 Dummy entries ! maître
\r
27462 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
27465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27466 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
\r
27471 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
\r
27472 maïs, maison, maître.
\r
27473 To achieve this, we use the command
\r
27476 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27479 previous entry@current entry
\r
27482 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27483 In our case we want to have
\r
27484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27499 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
\r
27502 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27508 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27509 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
\r
27510 You can also use another word to tell LaTeX the entry order.
\r
27511 See the next subsection for an example.
\r
27514 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27515 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
\r
27521 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27522 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
\r
27527 to generate the index (see sec.
\r
27528 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
27532 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
27534 reference "sub:Index-Program"
\r
27543 would for example print the index entry for the LaTeX-package aeguill in
\r
27545 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
27549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
27551 reference "sub:Document-Font"
\r
27555 after the index entries of the other LaTeX-packages although all these
\r
27556 index commands start with
\r
27557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27569 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
\r
27574 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
\r
27577 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27589 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27601 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
27602 Index Entry Layout
\r
27603 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
27606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27607 Index ! Entry layout
\r
27615 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27616 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
\r
27617 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
27620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27623 This is an italic dummy entry
\r
27628 You can also format the page number using the character
\r
27629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27636 followed by a LaTeX-command without a backslash.
\r
27637 We can write for example
\r
27640 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27643 italic page number:|textit
\r
27646 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27647 to get the page number in italic.
\r
27648 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
27651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27652 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
\r
27657 Normally all LaTeX-commands begin with a backslash, but in this special
\r
27659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27667 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27675 \begin_inset space ~
\r
27681 Have a look at section
\r
27682 \begin_inset space ~
\r
27686 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
27688 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
\r
27692 to learn more about the LaTeX-syntax.
\r
27695 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27696 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
27699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27704 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
\r
27708 to generate the index, see sec.
\r
27709 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
27713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
27715 reference "sub:Index-Program"
\r
27724 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
\r
27729 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
\r
27730 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
27731 LatexCommand cite
\r
27732 after "p. 678 ff."
\r
27733 key "latexcompanion"
\r
27745 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27746 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
\r
27748 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
\r
27749 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
\r
27750 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
\r
27751 If so, put the following in the preamble
\r
27754 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27766 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27770 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27773 my entry|IndexDef
\r
27776 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27777 in the index entry.
\r
27778 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
27781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27782 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
\r
27787 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
\r
27788 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
\r
27789 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
\r
27792 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27793 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
\r
27794 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
\r
27795 a bold font for all index entries.
\r
27796 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
\r
27808 documentation for details,
\r
27809 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
27810 LatexCommand cite
\r
27811 key "makeindex,xindy"
\r
27818 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
27820 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
27823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27830 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
27831 LatexCommand label
\r
27832 name "sub:Index-Program"
\r
27839 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27840 If the index generation program
\r
27844 is installed, LyX uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
\r
27848 , the program that is part of every LaTeX distribution, is used.
\r
27849 \begin_inset Foot
\r
27852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27857 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
\r
27858 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
\r
27859 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
\r
27860 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
\r
27861 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
\r
27871 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in LyX's preferences
\r
27872 dialog, see section
\r
27873 \begin_inset space ~
\r
27877 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
27879 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
\r
27884 The available options are listed and explained in
\r
27885 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
27886 LatexCommand cite
\r
27887 key "makeindex,xindy"
\r
27892 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
\r
27896 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27897 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
\r
27898 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar \slash{}
\r
27899 or the options in
\r
27901 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
27902 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
27906 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
\r
27907 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
\r
27910 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
27914 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27915 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
\r
27916 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
\r
27917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27921 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27924 next to the standard index.
\r
27925 LaTeX does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
\r
27926 that add this feature.
\r
27932 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
27935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27936 LaTeX-packages ! splitidx
\r
27941 package to generate multiple indexes.
\r
27942 The package is included in all recent LaTeX distributions.
\r
27943 \begin_inset Foot
\r
27946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27947 If yours does not ship it, consult the TeX-catalogue,
\r
27948 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
27949 LatexCommand cite
\r
27950 key "TeXCatalogue"
\r
27955 Note that the package does not only consist of a LaTeX style, but it also
\r
27956 includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
\r
27957 Please consult the package's manual for details.
\r
27965 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27966 To set up LyX for the use of multiple indexes, go to
\r
27968 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
27969 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
27972 and select the option
\r
27974 Use multiple Indexes
\r
27977 Note that the list
\r
27979 Available Indexes
\r
27981 already contains the standard index
\r
27982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27990 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
\r
27991 also appear as a heading) to the
\r
27995 input field and press the
\r
28000 The new index now also appears in the list.
\r
28001 If you like, you can attribute an alternative LyX label color to the new
\r
28005 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28006 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
\r
28009 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
28016 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
\r
28017 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
\r
28018 are additional features:
\r
28021 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
28022 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
\r
28023 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
\r
28026 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
28027 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
\r
28028 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
\r
28029 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28036 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
\r
28037 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
\r
28038 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
\r
28039 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
\r
28042 \begin_layout Section
\r
28043 Nomenclature/Glossary
\r
28044 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
28047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
28054 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
28057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
28062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
28073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
28086 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
28087 LatexCommand label
\r
28088 name "sec:Nomenclature"
\r
28095 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28096 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
\r
28097 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
\r
28098 called nomenclature or glossary.
\r
28101 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28102 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the LaTeX package
\r
28108 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
28111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
28112 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
\r
28118 You find it in the TeX-catalogue,
\r
28119 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
28120 LatexCommand cite
\r
28121 key "TeXCatalogue"
\r
28125 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
\r
28128 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28129 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
\r
28130 and then use the menu
\r
28132 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
28138 \begin_inset space ~
\r
28143 or the toolbar button
\r
28144 \begin_inset Info
\r
28146 arg "nomencl-insert"
\r
28150 A gray box labeled
\r
28151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28162 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
\r
28165 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28166 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
\r
28167 The first is the term or
\r
28171 that you wish to define.
\r
28172 The second is the
\r
28176 of the term or symbol.
\r
28179 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28180 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
28183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
28188 You have to enter valid LaTeX-code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
\r
28196 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
28197 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
\r
28198 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
28201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
28202 Nomenclature ! Layout
\r
28210 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28211 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
\r
28215 field as LaTeX-formulas.
\r
28216 For example to get
\r
28217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28221 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
\r
28225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28229 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
28237 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
28243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28250 character starts/ends the formula.
\r
28251 The LaTeX-command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning
\r
28252 with a backslash
\r
28253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28263 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
\r
28273 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28274 (A short introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
\r
28275 \begin_inset space ~
\r
28279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
28281 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
\r
28288 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28289 You cannot use the
\r
28292 \begin_inset space ~
\r
28297 dialog to format the description text; you have to use LaTeX-commands.
\r
28298 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
\r
28299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28303 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
\r
28307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28310 in this document is:
\r
28311 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
28316 dummy entry for the character
\r
28321 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
28330 sets the fonts to
\r
28333 \begin_inset space ~
\r
28343 font use the command
\r
28350 \family typewriter
\r
28372 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28373 If the characters |
\r
28374 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
28378 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
28382 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
28386 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
28390 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
28393 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
\r
28394 a quote character in front of them.
\r
28395 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
\r
28396 LatexCommand nomenclature
\r
28397 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
\r
28398 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
\r
28405 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
28406 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
\r
28407 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
28410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
28411 Nomenclature ! Sort order
\r
28419 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28420 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the LaTeX-code of
\r
28421 the symbol definition.
\r
28422 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
\r
28424 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
\r
28427 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
\r
28428 LatexCommand nomenclature
\r
28430 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
\r
28437 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
\r
28441 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
\r
28442 LatexCommand nomenclature
\r
28444 symbol "$\\sigma$"
\r
28445 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
\r
28450 They will be sorted by
\r
28451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28467 \family typewriter
\r
28473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28477 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
\r
28480 will be sorted before the
\r
28484 since the character
\r
28485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28492 is considered in sorting.
\r
28495 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28496 To control the sort order, you can edit the
\r
28499 \begin_inset space ~
\r
28504 field of the nomenclature dialog.
\r
28505 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
\r
28507 For the example given, you can insert
\r
28508 \family typewriter
\r
28511 in this field for the
\r
28512 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
\r
28519 will be located before
\r
28520 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
\r
28526 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28527 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
\r
28532 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
28533 LatexCommand cite
\r
28541 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
28542 Nomenclature Options
\r
28543 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
28546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
28547 Nomenclature ! Options
\r
28555 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28560 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
\r
28561 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
\r
28564 \begin_layout Description
\r
28565 refeq Appends the phrase
\r
28566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28581 to every nomenclature entry, where
\r
28587 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
\r
28590 \begin_layout Description
\r
28591 refpage Appends the phrase
\r
28592 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28607 to every nomenclature entry, where
\r
28613 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
\r
28616 \begin_layout Description
\r
28617 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
\r
28620 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28621 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
\r
28622 class options list in the
\r
28624 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
28628 In this document the options
\r
28635 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28636 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
\r
28642 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28643 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
\r
28644 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
\r
28649 field in the nomenclature dialog:
\r
28652 \begin_layout Description
\r
28655 nomrefeq Like the
\r
28662 \begin_layout Description
\r
28665 nomrefpage Like the
\r
28672 \begin_layout Description
\r
28675 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
\r
28684 \begin_layout Description
\r
28688 \begin_inset space ~
\r
28694 \begin_inset space ~
\r
28699 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
\r
28702 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28704 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28708 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28711 are automatically translated for some document languages.
\r
28712 If not, add these lines to your LaTeX preamble:
\r
28715 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28723 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
\r
28725 nobreakspace(#1)}
\r
28726 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
28733 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
\r
28735 nobreakspace{}#1}
\r
28738 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
28742 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28757 by their translation.
\r
28760 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
28761 Printing the Nomenclature
\r
28762 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
28765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
28766 Nomenclature ! Printing
\r
28774 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28775 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
\r
28777 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
28778 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
28783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28794 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
\r
28795 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
\r
28796 You can choose between these settings:
\r
28799 \begin_layout Description
\r
28800 Default a space of 1
\r
28801 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
28807 \begin_layout Description
\r
28809 \begin_inset space ~
\r
28813 \begin_inset space ~
\r
28816 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
\r
28819 \begin_layout Description
\r
28820 Custom custom space
\r
28823 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28824 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
\r
28825 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28833 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
\r
28841 For example, in order to change the name to
\r
28845 , add the following line to the preamble:
\r
28848 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28856 nomname}{List of Symbols}
\r
28859 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
28860 Nomenclature Program
\r
28861 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
28864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
28865 Nomenclature ! Program
\r
28871 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
28872 LatexCommand label
\r
28873 name "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
\r
28880 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28881 LyX uses the program
\r
28885 , that is part of every LaTeX distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
\r
28886 LyX's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
\r
28891 by adding options, see section
\r
28892 \begin_inset space ~
\r
28896 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
28898 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
\r
28903 The available options are listed and explained in
\r
28904 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
28905 LatexCommand cite
\r
28906 key "nomencl,makeindex"
\r
28913 \begin_layout Section
\r
28915 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
28918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
28925 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
28928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
28929 Document ! Branches
\r
28935 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
28936 LatexCommand label
\r
28937 name "sec:Branches"
\r
28944 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28945 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
\r
28946 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
\r
28947 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
\r
28948 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
\r
28951 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28952 For these cases LyX allows you to put text into branches.
\r
28953 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
\r
28954 To create a branch, either select the menu
\r
28956 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
28957 Branch\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
28958 Insert New Branch
\r
28960 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
\r
28962 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
28969 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
\r
28970 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
\r
28971 its background color inside LyX and whether the name of the branch should
\r
28972 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
\r
28973 (see below for an example).
\r
28974 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
\r
28975 to the name of the other) and to add
\r
28976 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28980 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28984 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
28988 \begin_inset space ~
\r
28991 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
\r
28992 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
\r
28995 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28996 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
\r
28997 These boxes are inserted via the menu
\r
28999 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
29002 where you can choose a branch.
\r
29003 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
\r
29007 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29008 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
\r
29009 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
\r
29012 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29013 \begin_inset Branch Question
\r
29016 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29017 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
\r
29025 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29026 \begin_inset Branch Answer
\r
29029 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29030 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
\r
29038 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29045 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
29046 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
29049 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
\r
29050 Consider for example a file
\r
29051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
29055 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
29058 which has the above branches.
\r
29060 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
29064 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
29067 is active, the PDF export file would be called
\r
29068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
29072 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
29076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
29080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
29084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
29088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
29091 branch were inactive,
\r
29092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
29095 Exam-Question.pdf
\r
29096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
29100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
29104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
29107 branch was active, likewise
\r
29108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
29112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
29116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
29120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
29123 branch was active, and
\r
29124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
29127 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
\r
29128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
29131 if both branches were active.
\r
29132 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
\r
29135 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29136 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
\r
29142 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29143 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
\r
29144 like inside equations, you can code special LaTeX definitions for each
\r
29146 For example you can define for the question branch
\r
29147 \begin_inset Foot
\r
29150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29151 For an introduction to the LaTeX-syntax, see section
\r
29152 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
29158 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
\r
29170 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29180 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29190 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29191 and for the answer branch
\r
29194 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29204 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29214 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29215 \begin_inset Branch Question
\r
29218 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29250 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29251 \begin_inset Branch Answer
\r
29254 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29286 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29287 Now it is possible to use the
\r
29291 question{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
\r
29298 answer{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
\r
29301 commands to obtain conditional output.
\r
29302 Here is an example formula where only the
\r
29309 \begin_inset Formula
\r
29311 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
\r
29319 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29320 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
\r
29328 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29329 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
\r
29331 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
29335 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
29338 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own LaTeX commands.).
\r
29339 For this advanced usage, see the
\r
29344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
29347 Flex insets and InsetLayout
\r
29348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
29354 \begin_layout Section
\r
29356 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
29357 LatexCommand label
\r
29358 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
\r
29363 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
29366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29375 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29378 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
29379 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
29382 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
\r
29384 All these options are provided by the LaTeX-package
\r
29389 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
29392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29393 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
\r
29398 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
\r
29399 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
\r
29400 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
\r
29401 part of the document.
\r
29405 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29406 The header information in the dialog tab
\r
29410 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
\r
29411 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
\r
29412 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
\r
29413 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
\r
29417 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29421 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29426 is set, LyX tries to extract the header information from your document
\r
29427 title and author entries.
\r
29431 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29435 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29439 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29444 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
\r
29447 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29448 You can specify in the dialog tab
\r
29452 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
\r
29457 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29461 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29465 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29470 option allows long links to be split;
\r
29473 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29477 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29481 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29489 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29494 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
\r
29497 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29502 colors the different links.
\r
29503 The default colors are:
\r
29506 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
29507 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
29512 for hyperlinks and URLs
\r
29515 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
29516 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
29524 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
29525 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
29533 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29534 but you can change these in the field
\r
29536 Additional options
\r
29539 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
\r
29542 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29545 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
\r
29548 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29553 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
\r
29554 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
\r
29555 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
\r
29558 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29559 In the dialog tab
\r
29563 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
\r
29564 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
\r
29565 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
\r
29575 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
\r
29576 when opening the PDF.
\r
29577 For example level
\r
29578 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29581 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
\r
29582 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29585 1 will only display the sections.
\r
29588 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29589 PDF properties are also used in this document.
\r
29590 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
\r
29595 options are used.
\r
29596 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
\r
29597 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
29598 LatexCommand cite
\r
29606 \begin_layout Section
\r
29607 TeX Code and the LaTeX Syntax
\r
29608 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
29609 LatexCommand label
\r
29610 name "sec:TeX-Code"
\r
29617 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
29619 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
29622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29629 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
29630 LatexCommand label
\r
29631 name "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
\r
29638 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29639 As LyX uses LaTeX in the background, it supports many LaTeX commands and
\r
29640 constructs, but not all.
\r
29641 LaTeX contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
\r
29642 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
\r
29643 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
\r
29644 is a LaTeX-package for every problem, though LyX cannot support all packages
\r
29645 and their commands.
\r
29648 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29649 But don't worry, you can use any LaTeX-command directly in LyX inside the
\r
29651 A TeX Code box is created by the menu
\r
29653 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
29658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29666 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29671 or by the toolbar button
\r
29672 \begin_inset Info
\r
29678 \begin_inset Info
\r
29684 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
\r
29685 it and selecting
\r
29692 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29693 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as TeX Code.
\r
29694 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard LyX text.
\r
29695 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
\r
29696 using the LaTeX-command
\r
29702 , you can write the command part
\r
29708 in a TeX Code box before the word and the closing brace
\r
29712 in a second TeX Code box behind the word.
\r
29713 The word between the two TeX Code boxes is then the argument as it is in
\r
29714 the following example:
\r
29717 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29718 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
29719 filename clipart/ERT.png
\r
29727 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29731 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29732 This is a line with a
\r
29736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29759 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29760 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
29763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29768 At the end of LaTeX-commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
\r
29769 to let LaTeX know that the command is finished.
\r
29777 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
29778 A Short Introduction to the LaTeX Syntax
\r
29779 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
29782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29789 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
29792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29799 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
29800 LatexCommand label
\r
29801 name "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
\r
29808 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29809 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
\r
29810 about the LaTeX-commands that LyX uses in the background.
\r
29811 Because LaTeX is based on commands, you can
\r
29812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
29816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
29820 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
\r
29821 any time if you know the right commands.
\r
29822 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
\r
29823 is the end of the day.
\r
29824 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
\r
29825 all caption labels bold.
\r
29826 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
\r
29828 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
\r
29832 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29833 Now LaTeX comes into play.
\r
29834 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a LaTeX-package.
\r
29835 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the LaTeX package
\r
29837 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
29838 LatexCommand cite
\r
29846 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29847 As result you find that the package
\r
29852 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
29855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29856 LaTeX-packages ! caption
\r
29861 is what you need.
\r
29862 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
\r
29864 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
29867 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
29874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29882 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29887 ) with the command
\r
29890 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29895 usepackage[options]{package name}
\r
29898 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29899 All LaTeX commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
\r
29900 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
\r
29901 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
\r
29904 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29905 In your case the package name is
\r
29910 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
\r
29915 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
\r
29916 So you add the command
\r
29919 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29924 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
\r
29927 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29928 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
\r
29929 \begin_inset Foot
\r
29932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29933 For more commands provided by the
\r
29937 package, have a look at its documentation,
\r
29938 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
29939 LatexCommand cite
\r
29952 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29953 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
\r
29955 For example if you use a
\r
29959 class, you don't need the package
\r
29963 , you can instead write
\r
29966 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29971 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
\r
29976 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29977 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
\r
29978 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
\r
29979 documentation of the document class you want to use.
\r
29986 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
\r
29989 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29990 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
\r
29991 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
\r
29993 To insert a LaTeX-command in text, use the TeX Code box as described in
\r
29994 the previous section.
\r
29997 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29998 If you want to learn more about LaTeX and its syntax, have a look at the
\r
30000 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
30001 LatexCommand cite
\r
30002 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
\r
30009 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30010 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
\r
30016 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30030 \begin_inset Note Note
\r
30033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30034 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
\r
30042 \begin_layout Left Header
\r
30043 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
30046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30066 \begin_inset Note Note
\r
30069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30070 defines the header line as described below
\r
30078 \begin_layout Center Header
\r
30079 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
30082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30091 \begin_layout Right Header
\r
30092 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
30095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30116 \begin_layout Left Footer
\r
30117 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
30120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30141 \begin_layout Center Footer
\r
30142 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
30145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30156 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
30160 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
\r
30166 \begin_layout Right Footer
\r
30167 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
30170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30192 \begin_layout Section
\r
30193 Customized Page Headers and Footers
\r
30194 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
30195 LatexCommand label
\r
30196 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
\r
30201 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
30204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30205 Document ! Header/Footer line
\r
30211 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
30214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30215 Header/Footer line
\r
30223 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30224 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
\r
30228 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30239 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
30245 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30251 As a second step add in the menu
\r
30253 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
30254 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
30258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
30261 Custom Header/Footerlines
\r
30262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
30266 This module offers the following 6
\r
30267 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30273 \begin_layout Description
\r
30275 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30279 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30283 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30287 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30291 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30297 \begin_layout Description
\r
30299 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30303 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30307 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30311 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30315 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30321 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30322 for the different positions in the header/footer.
\r
30325 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30326 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
\r
30327 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
\r
30329 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
30335 reference "fig:Page-layout"
\r
30339 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
\r
30342 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30343 \begin_inset Float figure
\r
30349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30352 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
30353 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
\r
30354 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
30355 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
\r
30356 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
\r
30357 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
\r
30359 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
30360 \begin_inset Text
\r
30362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
\r
30369 \begin_inset Text
\r
30371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30377 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
30378 \begin_inset Text
\r
30380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30388 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
30389 \begin_inset Text
\r
30391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
30398 \begin_inset Text
\r
30400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30406 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
30407 \begin_inset Text
\r
30409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30417 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
\r
30418 \begin_inset Text
\r
30420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30421 The normal text on the page goes here.
\r
30422 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
\r
30424 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
\r
30425 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
\r
30430 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
30431 \begin_inset Text
\r
30439 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
30440 \begin_inset Text
\r
30450 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
30451 \begin_inset Text
\r
30453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
30460 \begin_inset Text
\r
30462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30468 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
30469 \begin_inset Text
\r
30471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30479 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
30480 \begin_inset Text
\r
30482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
30489 \begin_inset Text
\r
30491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30497 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
30498 \begin_inset Text
\r
30500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30515 \begin_inset Caption Standard
\r
30517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30518 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
30519 LatexCommand label
\r
30520 name "fig:Page-layout"
\r
30524 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
\r
30537 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30538 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
30541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30546 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
\r
30550 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30555 is set to “Default”.
\r
30556 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
\r
30565 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
30569 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30570 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
\r
30571 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
\r
30572 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
\r
30573 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
\r
30575 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
\r
30576 Defining the footer line works similarly.
\r
30579 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30580 For the definition, you will need some LaTeX-commands that are inserted
\r
30581 as TeX code (menu
\r
30583 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
30588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30596 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30604 \begin_layout Description
\r
30607 thepage prints the current page number
\r
30610 \begin_layout Description
\r
30613 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
\r
30616 \begin_layout Description
\r
30619 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
\r
30622 \begin_layout Description
\r
30625 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
\r
30626 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
\r
30629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
30633 \begin_inset Quotes prd
\r
30636 because it usually goes in a left header.
\r
30639 \begin_layout Description
\r
30642 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
\r
30643 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
\r
30645 It is normally used in the right header.
\r
30648 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
30649 Default header/footer
\r
30652 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30653 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
\r
30654 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
\r
30655 footer has the page number.
\r
30656 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
\r
30657 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
\r
30658 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
\r
30661 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30669 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
30673 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30674 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
\r
30675 Some pages are different.
\r
30676 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
\r
30677 a new part or chapter in your book.
\r
30678 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
\r
30679 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
\r
30680 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
\r
30683 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
30684 Header and footer decoration line
\r
30687 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30688 By default, you get a 0.4
\r
30689 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
30692 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
\r
30693 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
\r
30705 in the following way:
\r
30708 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30715 headrulewidth}{thickness}
\r
30718 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30719 where thickness is a size in standard units like
\r
30728 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
\r
30729 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
30735 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30736 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of LaTeX.
\r
30737 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
\r
30738 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30742 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
30743 LatexCommand cite
\r
30751 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
30752 Several header/footer lines
\r
30755 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30756 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
\r
30757 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
\r
30758 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
\r
30760 To expand the height, redefine the LaTeX length
\r
30772 in this entry in
\r
30774 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
30775 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
30780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30788 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30796 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30803 headheight}{height}
\r
30806 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30807 where height is a size in standard units.
\r
30808 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
\r
30809 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
\r
30810 Then open the LaTeX logfile with the menu
\r
30812 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
30817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30826 and use the button
\r
30829 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30834 to see if you can find a warning about the package
\r
30839 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
30842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30843 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
\r
30849 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
\r
30850 for your header/footer.
\r
30853 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
30857 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30858 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
\r
30859 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
\r
30860 This example consists of the following definition:
\r
30863 \begin_layout Description
\r
30865 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30874 , empty optional argument
\r
30877 \begin_layout Description
\r
30879 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30882 Header empty, empty optional argument
\r
30885 \begin_layout Description
\r
30887 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30896 in the optional argument
\r
30899 \begin_layout Description
\r
30901 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30910 in the optional argument
\r
30913 \begin_layout Description
\r
30915 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30927 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
30931 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
30935 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
\r
30939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
30942 in the optional argument
\r
30945 \begin_layout Description
\r
30947 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30956 , empty optional argument
\r
30959 \begin_layout Description
\r
30962 headrulewidth set to 2
\r
30963 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
30969 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30970 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
\r
30971 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
\r
30977 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
30978 LatexCommand cite
\r
30986 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30987 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
\r
30993 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31001 pagestyle{headings}
\r
31007 \begin_inset Note Note
\r
31010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31011 switches back to page style with the default headings
\r
31019 \begin_layout Section
\r
31020 Previewing Snippets of your Document
\r
31021 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
31022 LatexCommand label
\r
31023 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
\r
31028 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
31031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31038 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
31041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31042 Document ! Preview
\r
31050 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31051 LyX allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the
\r
31052 fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
\r
31053 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
\r
31056 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
31060 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31061 To get previews working, you need the LaTeX package
\r
31066 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
31069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31070 LaTeX-packages ! preview-latex
\r
31075 (on some systems named simply
\r
31080 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the TeX-catalogue,
\r
31082 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
31083 LatexCommand cite
\r
31084 key "TeXCatalogue"
\r
31088 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
\r
31089 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
\r
31090 \family typewriter
\r
31094 \family typewriter
\r
31097 package; for LyX on Windows this program and also the LaTeX-package are
\r
31098 automatically installed together with LyX.
\r
31101 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
31102 Enabling previews
\r
31105 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31106 If you would for example like to see in LyX your math formulas typeset by
\r
31107 LaTeX, activate the option
\r
31110 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31117 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
31123 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31127 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31130 feel\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
31137 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31150 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31155 is the multiplication factor for the size.
\r
31158 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31159 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by LaTeX,
\r
31163 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31171 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31179 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31180 Previews are generated when you load a document into LyX and when you finish
\r
31181 editing an inset.
\r
31184 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31185 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
31188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31193 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
\r
31194 generated by activating the option
\r
31197 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31203 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
\r
31211 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
31212 Selected document parts
\r
31215 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31216 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
\r
31217 for example things that LyX cannot render like rotated parts or things
\r
31218 that are not yet supported by LyX.
\r
31219 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
\r
31221 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
31225 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
\r
31226 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
\r
31227 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
\r
31230 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31231 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the LaTeX command
\r
31237 which is not yet supported by LyX.
\r
31238 \begin_inset Foot
\r
31241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31248 is explained in section
\r
31250 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
\r
31255 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31265 Instead of the TeX Code boxes you want to see in LyX the final rotated
\r
31266 boxes, for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding
\r
31268 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
\r
31270 Here is the result:
\r
31273 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31274 \begin_inset Preview
\r
31276 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31285 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
\r
31291 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
\r
31301 height_special "totalheight"
\r
31304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31329 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
\r
31335 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
\r
31342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31357 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31358 Previewing works also for colors.
\r
31359 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the LaTeX
\r
31367 \begin_inset Foot
\r
31370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31377 is explained in section
\r
31384 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31397 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31398 \begin_inset Preview
\r
31400 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31423 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
\r
31428 This is text within a colored, framed box.
\r
31432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31447 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31448 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
\r
31454 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31455 If LyX does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
\r
31456 above and also make sure that TeX Code in the preview inset is valid and
\r
31457 that you loaded the LaTeX packages in your document preamble that are required
\r
31459 If LyX cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able
\r
31460 to view your document due to LaTeX errors.
\r
31461 So if you have to use some TeX Code and don't know if it is correct, the
\r
31462 preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the
\r
31466 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
31467 LaTeX source code
\r
31470 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31471 You can preview the LaTeX source of the whole document or parts of it.
\r
31474 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
31476 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31481 and a window will be shown where you can see the LaTeX-source code.
\r
31482 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
\r
31484 You can also select document parts in LyX's main window, then only this
\r
31485 selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
\r
31486 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
\r
31487 the source view window.
\r
31492 , you can see the changes as you make them in LyX; but note that if you
\r
31493 have several documents open, this will slow things down as LyX updates
\r
31494 them all, not just the one which is open at the time.
\r
31497 \begin_layout Section
\r
31498 Advanced Find and Replace
\r
31499 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
31500 LatexCommand label
\r
31501 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
\r
31506 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
31509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31516 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
31519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31528 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
31532 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31533 The advanced find and replace feature of LyX allows for searching of complex,
\r
31534 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within LyX documents.
\r
31535 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
\r
31536 The key-features are:
\r
31539 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
31540 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
\r
31541 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
\r
31542 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
\r
31546 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
31547 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
\r
31548 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
\r
31549 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
\r
31550 a section heading will only be found within section headings
\r
31553 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
31554 Search may be widened to a specific
\r
31559 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
31563 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31566 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
\r
31567 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
\r
31574 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
31575 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
\r
31576 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
\r
31577 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
31581 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31584 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
\r
31587 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
31591 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31592 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
\r
31594 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
31605 \begin_inset Info
\r
31607 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
\r
31610 ) or the toolbar button
\r
31611 \begin_inset Info
\r
31613 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
\r
31619 Advanced Find and Replace
\r
31624 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
31625 Searching for text
\r
31628 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31633 LyX mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
\r
31637 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31642 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
\r
31643 \begin_inset Info
\r
31645 arg "break-paragraph"
\r
31649 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
\r
31650 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
\r
31652 \begin_inset Info
\r
31654 arg "break-paragraph"
\r
31657 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
\r
31661 searches backwards.
\r
31664 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31668 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31673 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
\r
31682 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31687 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
\r
31690 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
31691 Searching for mathematics
\r
31694 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31695 Mathematical formulas, such as
\r
31696 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
\r
31699 or something more complex like
\r
31700 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
\r
31703 , may be searched for by typing them in the
\r
31708 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
\r
31709 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
\r
31710 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
\r
31711 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
\r
31717 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
31718 Style-aware search
\r
31721 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31722 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
\r
31723 This is done by switching to the
\r
31727 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
\r
31732 This way, entering in the
\r
31739 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
31740 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
\r
31741 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
\r
31744 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
31745 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
\r
31746 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
\r
31749 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
31750 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
\r
31751 of it only within section headings.
\r
31752 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
\r
31753 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
\r
31757 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
31758 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
\r
31759 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
\r
31762 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
31766 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31767 The entries made in the
\r
31771 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
\r
31774 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31780 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
\r
31784 button or alternatively press
\r
31785 \begin_inset Info
\r
31787 arg "break-paragraph"
\r
31794 while the cursor is in the
\r
31797 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31805 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31806 You can replace with fully-featured formatted LyX entries.
\r
31807 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
\r
31811 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
31812 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
\r
31813 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
\r
31814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
31818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
31821 with its typewriter version
\r
31822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
31826 \family typewriter
\r
31830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
31836 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
31837 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
\r
31839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
31843 \begin_inset Formula $R$
\r
31847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
31851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
31855 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
\r
31859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
31862 (you may want to enable the
\r
31865 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31873 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31878 options and disable the
\r
31886 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
\r
31887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
31891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
31894 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
\r
31895 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
\r
31899 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\, j}$
\r
31902 , or occurrences of
\r
31903 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
\r
31907 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
\r
31913 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
31917 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31918 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
\r
31919 \begin_inset Foot
\r
31922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31923 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
\r
31925 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
31926 LatexCommand href
\r
31927 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
\r
31936 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
\r
31942 This is done with the context menu
\r
31944 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
31945 Insert Regular Expression
\r
31947 while the cursor is in the
\r
31952 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
\r
31953 expression matching rules
\r
31954 \begin_inset Foot
\r
31957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31958 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed LyX
\r
31960 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
31964 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31967 when matching LaTeX code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed
\r
31968 to match expressions.
\r
31973 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
\r
31974 same text in the document.
\r
31975 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
\r
31976 Examples of using such a feature may be:
\r
31979 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
31980 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
\r
31985 editor the fraction
\r
31986 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
\r
31990 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
\r
31993 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
\r
31994 fractions with the given denominator.
\r
31997 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
31998 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
\r
32010 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
\r
32015 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
\r
32016 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
\r
32017 Also, by inserting a
\r
32018 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
\r
32021 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
\r
32022 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
\r
32025 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32026 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
\r
32027 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
\r
32028 \begin_inset Formula $()$
\r
32031 , and referring back to them through
\r
32032 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
\r
32036 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
\r
32040 For example, try searching with the regexp
\r
32041 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
32044 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
\r
32047 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
32050 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
\r
32053 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32054 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
\r
32057 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32058 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
32061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32066 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
\r
32067 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
\r
32068 sub-expressions is absolute.
\r
32070 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32074 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
\r
32077 always refers to the first occurrence of
\r
32078 \begin_inset Formula $()$
\r
32081 in all entered regexps.
\r
32089 \begin_layout Section
\r
32091 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
32092 LatexCommand label
\r
32093 name "sec:Spellchecking"
\r
32098 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
32101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32110 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32111 LyX has a built-in spell checker.
\r
32114 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32121 or the toolbar button
\r
32122 \begin_inset Info
\r
32124 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
\r
32127 starts the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
\r
32128 beginning of the currently selected text.
\r
32129 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
\r
32130 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
\r
32131 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
\r
32132 scrolled so that it is visible.
\r
32133 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
\r
32134 n, if any could be found.
\r
32135 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
\r
32139 field, double-click directly invokes the replacement.
\r
32140 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
\r
32143 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32144 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
\r
32145 that is set in the
\r
32147 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32151 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
\r
32152 a different one at the top of the dialog.
\r
32153 LyX can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
\r
32154 This works if you have marked the different languages appropriately and
\r
32155 have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
\r
32156 LyX automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
\r
32159 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32160 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here:
\r
32161 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
32165 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
32168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32170 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
\r
32176 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
32180 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32183 files for each language.
\r
32184 To install a dictionary, copy the 2
\r
32185 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32188 files into LyX's installation subfolder
\r
32199 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
32203 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32204 In LyX's preferences dialog under
\r
32207 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32210 Setting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32213 you can set the following things:
\r
32216 \begin_layout Description
\r
32218 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32221 engine Select the library LyX should use for spell checking.
\r
32222 Depending on your platform,
\r
32223 \family typewriter
\r
32227 \family typewriter
\r
32231 \family typewriter
\r
32233 \begin_inset Foot
\r
32236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32237 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
\r
32238 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
\r
32247 \family typewriter
\r
32253 \begin_layout Description
\r
32255 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32258 language If this field is not empty, LyX will always use the given language
\r
32259 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
\r
32262 \begin_layout Description
\r
32264 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32267 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
\r
32268 should escape, e.
\r
32269 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
32273 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
32277 This should normally not be needed.
\r
32280 \begin_layout Description
\r
32282 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32286 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32289 words Prevent the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
\r
32291 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
32295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
32301 \begin_layout Description
\r
32303 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32306 continuously Check the spelling of your document as you type it.
\r
32307 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
\r
32308 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
\r
32309 appear in the context menu.
\r
32310 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
\r
32314 \begin_layout Description
\r
32316 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32320 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32324 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32327 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document contents is checked
\r
32331 \begin_layout Section
\r
32333 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
32336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32343 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
32344 LatexCommand label
\r
32345 name "sec:Thesaurus"
\r
32352 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32353 LyX provides a multilingual thesaurus.
\r
32354 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
\r
32356 \family typewriter
\r
32360 \begin_inset Foot
\r
32363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32364 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
32365 LatexCommand href
\r
32366 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
\r
32375 thesaurus library, which is included in LyX).
\r
32376 Therefore, LyX can directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries, which
\r
32377 are available for many languages.
\r
32380 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32381 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
\r
32382 the use with LyX.
\r
32385 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
32386 Setting up the thesaurus
\r
32389 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32391 \family typewriter
\r
32397 OpenOffice thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
\r
32402 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
\r
32407 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
\r
32409 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
32413 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32421 For instance, the US English files are named:
\r
32424 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
32428 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
32432 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32433 If you have LibreOffice or OpenOffice and its thesaurus installed on a Linux
\r
32434 system, these files should be already on your system.
\r
32435 On Windows you can choose in LyX's installer wich dictionaries should be
\r
32439 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32440 All thesaurus dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here:
\r
32441 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
32445 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
32448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32450 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
\r
32456 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
32459 To install a dictionary, copy the 2
\r
32460 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32463 files into LyX's installation subfolder
\r
32474 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
32475 Using the thesaurus
\r
32478 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32479 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
\r
32481 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32484 or the toolbar button
\r
32485 \begin_inset Info
\r
32487 arg "thesaurus-entry"
\r
32490 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
\r
32492 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
\r
32494 The proposals are grouped into categories.
\r
32495 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
\r
32496 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
\r
32505 ), related terms (such as
\r
32508 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32517 ), compounds (such as
\r
32520 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32525 , if you look for
\r
32529 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
\r
32538 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
\r
32541 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32542 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
\r
32543 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
\r
32544 up directly there.
\r
32547 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32548 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
\r
32549 the dictionary, such as the above
\r
32553 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
\r
32554 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
32558 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
32561 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
\r
32562 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
\r
32563 For example looking up the word form
\r
32564 \change_deleted 2090807402 1338765333
\r
32570 \change_unchanged
\r
32575 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
\r
32581 \change_inserted 2090807402 1338765282
\r
32582 The thesuarus is able to resolve inflected forms (so if you enter
\r
32586 , it will resolve it to the form
\r
32590 which is in the dictionary).
\r
32591 However, this may not always work.
\r
32592 So if you do not get any results for inflected forms, try the lemma form.
\r
32594 \change_unchanged
\r
32595 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant parts of such word (e.
\r
32596 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
32600 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
32611 s), then you get proposals without adjusting the query in the dialog, and
\r
32612 also the replacement will probably be correct (as only the highlighted
\r
32613 part will be replaced, thus the ending remains).
\r
32616 \begin_layout Section
\r
32618 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
32621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32628 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
32631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32632 Document ! Change Tracking
\r
32638 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
32639 LatexCommand label
\r
32640 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
\r
32647 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32648 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
\r
32649 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
\r
32650 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
\r
32651 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
\r
32653 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32655 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32658 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32660 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32668 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32669 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
\r
32680 \strikeout default
\r
32683 The color depends on the author that made the change.
\r
32684 You can change the color in LyX's preferences dialog under
\r
32687 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32691 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32701 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
32704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32705 Color ! Change tracking
\r
32710 The author and the date of the change are shown in LyX's status bar when
\r
32711 the cursor is in changed text.
\r
32712 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
\r
32713 \begin_inset Info
\r
32715 arg "changes-merge"
\r
32721 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32722 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in LyX:
\r
32723 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
32726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32735 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32736 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
\r
32742 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32743 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
32744 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
\r
32752 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32753 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
\r
32759 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32760 The review toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
\r
32764 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32765 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
\r
32771 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32772 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
32773 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
\r
32774 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
\r
32775 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
\r
32776 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
\r
32777 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
32778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
32779 \begin_inset Text
\r
32781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32784 \begin_inset Info
\r
32786 arg "changes-track"
\r
32794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
32795 \begin_inset Text
\r
32797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32800 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32802 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32805 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32807 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32816 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
32817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
32818 \begin_inset Text
\r
32820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32823 \begin_inset Info
\r
32825 arg "changes-output"
\r
32833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
32834 \begin_inset Text
\r
32836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32839 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32841 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32844 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32846 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32850 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32854 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32863 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
32864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
32865 \begin_inset Text
\r
32867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32870 \begin_inset Info
\r
32872 arg "change-next"
\r
32880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
32881 \begin_inset Text
\r
32883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32884 Jumps to the next change
\r
32890 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
32891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
32892 \begin_inset Text
\r
32894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32897 \begin_inset Info
\r
32899 arg "change-accept"
\r
32907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
32908 \begin_inset Text
\r
32910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32913 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32915 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32918 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32920 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32929 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
32930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
32931 \begin_inset Text
\r
32933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32936 \begin_inset Info
\r
32938 arg "change-reject"
\r
32946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
32947 \begin_inset Text
\r
32949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32952 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32954 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32957 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32959 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32968 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
32969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
32970 \begin_inset Text
\r
32972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32975 \begin_inset Info
\r
32977 arg "changes-merge"
\r
32985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
32986 \begin_inset Text
\r
32988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32991 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32993 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32996 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32998 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33007 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
33008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
33009 \begin_inset Text
\r
33011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33014 \begin_inset Info
\r
33016 arg "all-changes-accept"
\r
33024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
33025 \begin_inset Text
\r
33027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33030 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
33032 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33035 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
33037 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33041 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33050 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
33051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
33052 \begin_inset Text
\r
33054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33057 \begin_inset Info
\r
33059 arg "all-changes-reject"
\r
33067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
33068 \begin_inset Text
\r
33070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33073 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
33075 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33078 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
33080 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33084 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33093 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
33094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
33095 \begin_inset Text
\r
33097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33100 \begin_inset Info
\r
33102 arg "note-insert"
\r
33110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
33111 \begin_inset Text
\r
33113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33116 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
33117 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
33119 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33128 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
33129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
33130 \begin_inset Text
\r
33132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33135 \begin_inset Info
\r
33145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
33146 \begin_inset Text
\r
33148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33151 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
33153 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33169 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33170 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
\r
33176 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33177 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
\r
33178 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
\r
33179 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
\r
33180 the next change after the current cursor position.
\r
33181 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
\r
33182 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
\r
33183 step to the next change.
\r
33184 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
\r
33187 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33188 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
\r
33189 to describe a change.
\r
33192 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33193 To show the made changes in the output you need the LaTeX package
\r
33198 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
33201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33202 LaTeX-packages ! dvipost
\r
33208 You will find it in the TeX Catalogue,
\r
33209 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
33210 LatexCommand cite
\r
33211 key "TeXCatalogue"
\r
33215 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
\r
33218 \begin_layout Section
\r
33219 Comparison of Documents
\r
33220 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
33223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33224 Comparison of documents
\r
33232 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33233 You can compare two different LyX files via the menu
\r
33235 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
33239 The comparison result is a LyX file with change tracking enabled showing
\r
33241 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document LyX should
\r
33242 take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
\r
33246 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33250 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33254 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33263 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33267 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33271 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33275 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33279 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33283 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33288 enables the change tracking option
\r
33291 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33295 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33299 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33304 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
\r
33307 \begin_layout Section
\r
33308 International Support
\r
33309 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
33312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33313 International support
\r
33321 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33322 This section describes how to use LyX with any language you want.
\r
33323 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
\r
33324 up LyX to use them:
\r
33325 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
33326 LatexCommand cite
\r
33327 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
\r
33334 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33335 Besides languages, LyX also supports phonetic symbols, see section
\r
33336 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33340 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
33342 reference "sub:Special-Character"
\r
33349 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
33351 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
33354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33355 Language ! Options
\r
33361 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
33364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33365 Document ! Settings
\r
33371 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
33374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33375 Document ! Language
\r
33383 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33386 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
33387 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
33390 dialog lets you set
\r
33392 the language, the quote style and character encoding
\r
33397 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33402 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for LaTeX export.
\r
33406 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33411 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
\r
33412 For details about the different encoding options see section
\r
33413 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33417 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
33419 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
\r
33426 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
33427 Keyboard mapping configuration
\r
33428 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
33429 LatexCommand label
\r
33430 name "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
\r
33437 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33438 If you have for example a U.
\r
33439 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
33442 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
\r
33443 can use an alternate keymap.
\r
33444 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure LyX to
\r
33445 use an Italian keymap.
\r
33448 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
33449 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
33450 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
33453 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
\r
33454 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
33460 reference "sub:Keyboard-Map"
\r
33465 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
\r
33466 which one you want to use.
\r
33469 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33470 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
\r
33471 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
\r
33472 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
\r
33473 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
33476 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
\r
33477 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
\r
33478 one to support the characters you want.
\r
33479 This and many other customizations are explained in the
\r
33486 \begin_layout Chapter
\r
33487 \start_of_appendix
\r
33488 The User Interface
\r
33489 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
33490 LatexCommand label
\r
33491 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
\r
33498 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33499 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
\r
33500 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
\r
33501 topic inside the user's guide.
\r
33504 \begin_layout Section
\r
33506 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
33509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33518 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33523 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
\r
33526 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
33530 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33531 Creates a new document.
\r
33534 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
33535 New from Template
\r
33538 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33539 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
\r
33540 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
\r
33541 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
\r
33544 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
33548 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33549 Opens a document.
\r
33552 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
33556 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33557 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
\r
33558 Click there on a file to open it.
\r
33561 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
33565 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33566 Closes the current document.
\r
33569 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
33573 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33574 Closes all opened documents.
\r
33577 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
33581 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33582 Saves the actual document.
\r
33585 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
33589 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33590 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
\r
33593 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
33597 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33598 Saves all opened documents.
\r
33601 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
33605 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33606 Reloads the actual document from disk.
\r
33609 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
33613 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33614 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
\r
33615 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
\r
33616 It is described in the section
\r
33618 Version Control in LyX
\r
33622 Additional Features
\r
33627 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
33631 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33632 Here you can import files from older LyX-versions, HTML-files, LaTeX-files,
\r
33633 NoWeb-files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files
\r
33635 The files will be imported as a new LyX-document.
\r
33638 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33639 When using the menu entry
\r
33642 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33647 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
\r
33651 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33655 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33660 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
\r
33661 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
\r
33664 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
33666 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
33667 LatexCommand label
\r
33668 name "sub:Export"
\r
33675 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33676 You can export your document to various file formats.
\r
33677 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your LyX-file.
\r
33678 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
\r
33679 They depend on the programs found by LyX during its configuration.
\r
33682 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33683 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
\r
33685 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33689 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
33691 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
\r
33698 \begin_layout Description
\r
33704 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33718 yX format of the special LyX
\r
33719 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33722 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
\r
33723 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
33726 Since LyX 1.5.0 CJK support is fully integrated into LyX.
\r
33729 \begin_layout Description
\r
33730 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
\r
33732 \family typewriter
\r
33736 \begin_layout Description
\r
33738 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33741 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
\r
33743 \family typewriter
\r
33747 \begin_layout Description
\r
33748 DraftDVI LaTeX's native DVI-format.
\r
33749 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
\r
33750 files paths or file names in your document.
\r
33751 LyX use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
\r
33758 \begin_layout Description
\r
33759 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
\r
33760 in files paths or file names
\r
33763 \begin_layout Description
\r
33765 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33779 eX) DVI-format using the program
\r
33780 \family typewriter
\r
33783 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-TeX fonts;
\r
33786 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
33789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33794 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
\r
33802 \begin_layout Description
\r
33804 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33807 Dot text file with code in the programming language
\r
33808 \family typewriter
\r
33811 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
\r
33812 \family typewriter
\r
33816 \begin_layout Description
\r
33817 HTML HTML-format (the HTML-converter is a third-party product and may not
\r
33818 work in all cases)
\r
33821 \begin_layout Description
\r
33823 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33827 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33830 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
\r
33834 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
\r
33835 not in the format
\r
33842 \begin_layout Description
\r
33849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33857 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33881 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
\r
33882 \family typewriter
\r
33886 \begin_layout Description
\r
33893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33901 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33906 text file with the LaTeX source, additionally all images used in the document
\r
33907 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
\r
33908 \family typewriter
\r
33911 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
\r
33914 \begin_layout Description
\r
33921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33929 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33934 text file with the LaTeX source code, additionally all images used in the
\r
33935 document will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable
\r
33937 \family typewriter
\r
33943 \begin_layout Description
\r
33950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33958 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33982 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
\r
33983 \family typewriter
\r
33987 \begin_layout Description
\r
33989 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33993 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
34011 TeX) text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the syntax of the
\r
34012 music notation software
\r
34013 \family typewriter
\r
34017 \begin_layout Description
\r
34024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
34034 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34038 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34041 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
\r
34042 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
\r
34043 to compile it (images, child documents, BibTeX files, etc.)
\r
34046 \begin_layout Description
\r
34053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
34063 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34066 z.y.x LyX-Document in a format readable by the LyX versions z.y.x (
\r
34067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
34071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
34075 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
34079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
34082 represent the version number)
\r
34085 \begin_layout Description
\r
34092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
34101 yXHTML HTML-format using LyX's internal XHTML engine
\r
34104 \begin_layout Description
\r
34105 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
\r
34106 \family typewriter
\r
34110 \begin_layout Description
\r
34111 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
\r
34113 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
\r
34116 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
\r
34120 \begin_layout Description
\r
34124 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34129 PDF-format using the program
\r
34130 \family typewriter
\r
34133 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
\r
34136 \begin_layout Description
\r
34140 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
34156 PDF-format using the program
\r
34157 \family typewriter
\r
34160 , produces PDF-files directly
\r
34163 \begin_layout Description
\r
34167 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34172 PDF-format using the program
\r
34173 \family typewriter
\r
34176 , produces PDF-files directly
\r
34179 \begin_layout Description
\r
34183 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34188 PDF-format using the program
\r
34189 \family typewriter
\r
34192 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
\r
34195 \begin_layout Description
\r
34199 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
34215 PDF-format using the program
\r
34216 \family typewriter
\r
34219 , produces PDF-files directly
\r
34222 \begin_layout Description
\r
34226 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34234 \begin_layout Description
\r
34238 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34242 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34247 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
\r
34248 and then exported as text using the program
\r
34253 \begin_layout Description
\r
34258 PostScript format using the program
\r
34259 \family typewriter
\r
34263 \begin_layout Description
\r
34264 Sweave text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the statistical
\r
34265 programming language
\r
34266 \family typewriter
\r
34271 \family typewriter
\r
34275 \family typewriter
\r
34278 it is possible to use
\r
34279 \family typewriter
\r
34282 -commands in LaTeX
\r
34285 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34286 If one of the menu entries
\r
34293 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34302 is missing, you need to update your LaTeX installation.
\r
34303 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section
\r
34304 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34310 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
\r
34315 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
34318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
34319 Reconfiguration of LyX
\r
34327 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34331 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34332 With this menu entry you can print your document to a file in PostScript
\r
34333 format or send it to a printer.
\r
34334 The printer will also use the document in PostScript format.
\r
34335 The conversion to PostScript is done in the background by LyX using the
\r
34337 \family typewriter
\r
34341 For more information have a look at section
\r
34342 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34346 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34348 reference "sub:Printing-the-File"
\r
34355 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34359 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34360 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
\r
34361 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to LyX's PATH
\r
34362 prefix, see section
\r
34363 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34367 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34369 reference "sec:Paths"
\r
34374 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
\r
34375 \family typewriter
\r
34379 \family typewriter
\r
34383 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
\r
34384 The format can be changed in LyX's preferences as described in section
\r
34385 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34391 reference "sub:Converters"
\r
34398 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34399 New and Close Window
\r
34402 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34403 Opens or closes a new instance of LyX.
\r
34406 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34410 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34411 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
\r
34414 \begin_layout Section
\r
34416 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
34419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
34428 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34432 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34433 Described in section
\r
34434 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34438 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34440 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
\r
34447 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34448 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
\r
34451 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34452 Described in section
\r
34453 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34457 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34459 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
\r
34466 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34467 Select Whole Inset
\r
34470 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34471 Selects the content of the inset where the cursor is currently in.
\r
34472 If the cursor is outside of an inset, the whole document will be selected.
\r
34475 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34479 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34480 Selects the whole document.
\r
34483 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34484 Find & Replace (Quick)
\r
34487 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34488 Described in section
\r
34489 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34495 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
\r
34502 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34503 Find & Replace (Advanced)
\r
34506 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34507 Described in section
\r
34508 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34512 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34514 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
\r
34521 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34522 Move Paragraph Up/Down
\r
34525 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34526 This shifts the paragraph where the cursor is currently in one paragraph
\r
34530 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34534 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34535 Described in section
\r
34536 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34540 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34542 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
\r
34549 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34550 Paragraph Settings
\r
34551 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
34554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
34555 Paragraph ! Settings
\r
34563 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34564 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
\r
34565 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
\r
34569 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34570 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
\r
34571 have chosen to separate paragraphs with indents in the
\r
34573 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
34579 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34587 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34588 Table Settings and Math
\r
34591 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34592 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
\r
34594 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
\r
34595 The properties of tables are described in section
\r
34596 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34600 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34602 reference "sec:Tables"
\r
34606 , the properties of formulas in chapter
\r
34607 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34611 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34613 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
\r
34620 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34621 Increase / Decrease List Depth
\r
34624 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34625 These menu entries are only active if the cursor is in an environment that
\r
34627 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
\r
34628 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34634 reference "sec:Nesting"
\r
34639 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34641 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
\r
34648 \begin_layout Section
\r
34650 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
34653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
34662 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34663 At the bottom of the
\r
34667 menu the opened documents are listed.
\r
34670 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34671 Open/Close all Insets
\r
34674 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34675 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
\r
34678 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34679 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
\r
34682 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34683 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
\r
34686 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34687 Math macros are described in the
\r
34694 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34698 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34699 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
\r
34701 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34705 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34707 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
\r
34714 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34718 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34719 Opens a window showing console messages.
\r
34720 This is useful for debugging LyX (i.
\r
34721 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
34724 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
\r
34725 while LaTeX is processing the document.
\r
34728 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34732 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34733 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
\r
34734 default output format either in the preferences (see sec.
\r
34735 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
34739 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34741 reference "sec:File-Formats"
\r
34745 ) or in the document settings (see sec.
\r
34746 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
34750 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34752 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
\r
34756 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
\r
34757 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences, see section
\r
34758 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34764 reference "sec:File-Formats"
\r
34769 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
\r
34770 The default output format is
\r
34773 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34781 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34782 View (Other Formats)
\r
34785 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34786 With this submenu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
\r
34787 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
\r
34788 actual document with an external program.
\r
34789 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
\r
34790 the LaTeX programs that are found while LyX was configured.
\r
34791 All possible formats are listed in section
\r
34792 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34796 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34798 reference "sub:Export"
\r
34803 You should at least see the menu entry
\r
34808 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your LaTeX installation.
\r
34809 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section
\r
34810 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34816 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
\r
34821 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
34824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
34825 Reconfiguration of LyX
\r
34833 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34834 Invoking a menu will start a viewer program.
\r
34835 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences, see section
\r
34836 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34840 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34842 reference "sec:File-Formats"
\r
34847 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
\r
34850 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34854 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34855 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
\r
34856 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
\r
34859 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34860 Update (Other Formats)
\r
34863 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34864 With this submenu you can update the view of alternative output formats
\r
34865 of your document without opening a new viewer window.
\r
34868 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34869 View Master Document
\r
34872 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34873 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
\r
34874 which is then its
\r
34875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
34879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
34889 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34894 manual for more information on this topic).
\r
34895 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
\r
34896 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
\r
34901 generates the output of the whole book, while
\r
34905 will just output the chapter alone.
\r
34908 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34909 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
\r
34910 in the preferences (see sec.
\r
34911 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
34915 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34917 reference "sec:File-Formats"
\r
34921 ) or in the document settings (see sec.
\r
34922 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
34926 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34928 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
\r
34935 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34936 Update Master Document
\r
34939 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34940 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
\r
34941 which is then its
\r
34942 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
34946 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
34956 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34961 manual for more information on this topic).
\r
34962 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
\r
34963 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
\r
34966 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34967 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
\r
34968 in the preferences (see sec.
\r
34969 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
34973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34975 reference "sec:File-Formats"
\r
34979 ) or in the document settings (see sec.
\r
34980 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
34984 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34986 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
\r
34993 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34997 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34998 This will split LyX's main window vertically or horizontally.
\r
34999 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
\r
35000 to view the same document, but at different positions.
\r
35001 You can even split the main window several times to view for example 3
\r
35002 or more documents at the same time.
\r
35003 To return to an unsplit view, use the menu
\r
35005 Close Current View
\r
35010 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
35011 Close Current View
\r
35014 \begin_layout Standard
\r
35015 Closes a split view.
\r
35018 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
35022 \begin_layout Standard
\r
35023 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
\r
35024 so that you will see nothing but your text.
\r
35025 It furthermore displays LyX's main window fullscreen.
\r
35026 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
\r
35027 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
\r
35030 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
35032 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
35033 LatexCommand label
\r
35034 name "sub:Toolbars"
\r
35039 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
35042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
35051 \begin_layout Standard
\r
35052 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
\r
35053 All toolbars and the
\r
35056 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35061 can be turned on and off.
\r
35066 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
\r
35078 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35086 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35095 toolbars can be additionally set to the state
\r
35099 that is denoted in the menu with the suffix
\r
35106 \begin_layout Standard
\r
35111 state the toolbar is permanently shown, in the
\r
35115 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
\r
35116 or when a certain feature is enabled.
\r
35117 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
\r
35118 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
\r
35119 is inside a formula or table, respectively.
\r
35122 \begin_layout Standard
\r
35123 LyX's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
\r
35124 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35128 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35130 reference "sec:Toolbars"
\r
35137 \begin_layout Section
\r
35139 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
35142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
35151 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
35155 \begin_layout Standard
\r
35156 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
\r
35157 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35161 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35163 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
\r
35174 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
35175 Special Character
\r
35176 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
35177 LatexCommand label
\r
35178 name "sub:Special-Character"
\r
35185 \begin_layout Standard
\r
35186 Here you can insert the following characters:
\r
35189 \begin_layout Description
\r
35190 Symbols Inserts any character that can be output by your LaTeX system.
\r
35191 Therefore the number of character categories in this dialog and the available
\r
35192 characters depend on the LaTeX-packages you have installed.
\r
35193 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
35197 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
35200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
35205 Not all characters will be visible in the
\r
35209 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
\r
35211 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
35215 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35217 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
\r
35221 ) can display every character.
\r
35229 \begin_layout Description
\r
35230 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar \ldots{}
\r
35234 \begin_layout Description
\r
35236 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35240 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35243 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence dot as described in section
\r
35244 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35248 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35250 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
\r
35257 \begin_layout Description
\r
35259 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35262 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote type you selected in the
\r
35265 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
35275 \begin_layout Description
\r
35277 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35281 \change_deleted -712698321 1345809482
\r
35283 \change_inserted -712698321 1345809484
\r
35285 \change_unchanged
\r
35287 \change_deleted -712698321 1345809487
\r
35289 \begin_inset Quotes ers
\r
35293 \change_inserted -712698321 1345809513
\r
35294 in the quotation marks style selected in the
\r
35296 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
35304 \change_unchanged
\r
35308 \begin_layout Description
\r
35310 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35313 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar \nobreakdash-
\r
35317 \begin_layout Description
\r
35319 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35322 Slash Inserts a slash where also a line break can occur: \SpecialChar \slash{}
\r
35326 \begin_layout Description
\r
35328 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35331 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
35335 \begin_layout Description
\r
35337 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35341 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
35344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
35351 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
35354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
35355 Language ! Phonetic symbols
\r
35361 \change_deleted -712698321 1345808954
\r
35362 Creates a formula with a so called tipa inset
\r
35363 \change_inserted -712698321 1345808969
\r
35364 Inserts a box where
\r
35365 \change_deleted -712698321 1345809001
\r
35368 \change_unchanged
\r
35370 \change_deleted -712698321 1345809047
\r
35371 commands to create IPA phonetic
\r
35372 \change_unchanged
\r
35374 \change_inserted -712698321 1345809189
\r
35375 from the International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which
\r
35376 provides a large set of these symbols
\r
35377 \change_unchanged
\r
35380 \change_deleted -712698321 1345809068
\r
35382 \change_inserted -712698321 1345809068
\r
35384 \change_unchanged
\r
35386 \change_inserted -712698321 1345809224
\r
35387 with traditional LaTeX
\r
35388 \change_unchanged
\r
35389 you must have the LaTeX-package
\r
35394 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
35397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
35398 LaTeX-packages ! tipa
\r
35404 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
35408 \change_deleted -712698321 1345809282
\r
35410 \change_inserted -712698321 1345809283
\r
35412 \change_unchanged
\r
35413 ore information about this feature
\r
35414 \change_deleted -712698321 1345809286
\r
35415 we refer you to the documentation of
\r
35418 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
35419 LatexCommand cite
\r
35426 and this Wiki-page:
\r
35427 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
35431 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
35434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
35436 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/LinguistLyX
\r
35442 \change_inserted -712698321 1345809397
\r
35443 can be found in the Linguistics manual (
\r
35445 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
35446 Specific Manuals\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
35447 Linguistics Manual
\r
35450 \change_unchanged
\r
35454 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
35458 \begin_layout Standard
\r
35459 Here you can insert the following format constructs:
\r
35462 \begin_layout Description
\r
35463 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
\r
35464 \begin_inset script superscript
\r
35466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
35475 \begin_layout Description
\r
35476 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
\r
35477 \begin_inset script subscript
\r
35479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
35488 \begin_layout Description
\r
35490 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35493 Space Inserts a protected space that is described in section
\r
35494 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35500 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
\r
35507 \begin_layout Description
\r
35509 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35512 Space Inserts an inter-word space that is described in section
\r
35513 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35517 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35519 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
\r
35526 \begin_layout Description
\r
35528 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35531 Space Inserts a thin space that is described in section
\r
35532 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35536 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35538 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
\r
35545 \begin_layout Description
\r
35547 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35550 Space Inserts horizontal space, see section
\r
35551 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35555 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35557 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
\r
35561 for a description.
\r
35564 \begin_layout Description
\r
35566 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35569 Line Inserts a horizontal line, see section
\r
35570 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35574 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35576 reference "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
\r
35580 for a description.
\r
35583 \begin_layout Description
\r
35585 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35588 Space Inserts vertical space, see section
\r
35589 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35593 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35595 reference "sub:Vertical-Space"
\r
35599 for a description.
\r
35602 \begin_layout Description
\r
35603 Phantom Inserts Phantom space, see section
\r
35604 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35608 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35610 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
\r
35617 \begin_layout Description
\r
35619 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35622 Point Inserts a hyphenation point, see section
\r
35623 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35629 reference "sub:Hyphenation"
\r
35636 \begin_layout Description
\r
35638 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35641 Break Inserts a ligature break, see section
\r
35642 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35646 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35648 reference "sub:Ligatures"
\r
35655 \begin_layout Description
\r
35657 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35661 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35664 Break Inserts a forced line break, see section
\r
35665 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35671 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
\r
35678 \begin_layout Description
\r
35680 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35683 Break Inserts a forced line break that furthermore stretches the broken
\r
35684 text line to the page border, see section
\r
35685 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35689 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35691 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
\r
35698 \begin_layout Description
\r
35700 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35703 Page Inserts a forced page break, described in section
\r
35704 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35708 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35710 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
\r
35717 \begin_layout Description
\r
35719 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35722 Break Inserts a forced page break that furthermore stretches the broken
\r
35723 text page to the page border, described in section
\r
35724 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35728 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35730 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
\r
35737 \begin_layout Description
\r
35739 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35742 Page Inserts a clear page break, described in section
\r
35743 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35747 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35749 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
\r
35756 \begin_layout Description
\r
35758 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35762 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35765 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break, described in section
\r
35766 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35770 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35772 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
\r
35779 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
35783 \begin_layout Standard
\r
35784 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
\r
35785 The table of contents, the algorithm, figures and tables list are described
\r
35787 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35793 reference "sec:toc"
\r
35798 The index list is described in section
\r
35799 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35803 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35805 reference "sec:Index"
\r
35809 , the nomenclature in section
\r
35810 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35816 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
\r
35820 and the BibTeX bibliography in section
\r
35821 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35825 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35827 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
\r
35834 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
35838 \begin_layout Standard
\r
35839 To insert floats, described in section
\r
35840 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35844 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35846 reference "sec:Floats"
\r
35853 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
35857 \begin_layout Standard
\r
35858 To insert notes, described in section
\r
35859 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35865 reference "sec:Notes"
\r
35872 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
35876 \begin_layout Standard
\r
35877 Inserts branch insets as described in section
\r
35878 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35882 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35884 reference "sec:Branches"
\r
35891 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
35895 \begin_layout Standard
\r
35896 Inserts document class-specific insets.
\r
35897 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
\r
35899 An example is the document class
\r
35900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
35903 article (Elsevier)
\r
35904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
35907 with three custom insets.
\r
35910 Flex insets and InsetLayout
\r
35916 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
\r
35919 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
35921 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
35924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
35925 External Material
\r
35933 \begin_layout Standard
\r
35934 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
\r
35935 in your document.
\r
35936 How you can do this is explained in detail in the chapter
\r
35943 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35951 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
35953 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
35956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
35965 \begin_layout Standard
\r
35966 Inserts a minipage box that is described section
\r
35967 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35971 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35973 reference "sec:Minipages"
\r
35978 All box types supported by LyX are explained in detail in the chapter
\r
35985 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35993 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
35997 \begin_layout Standard
\r
35998 Inserts a citation as described in section
\r
35999 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36003 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36005 reference "sec:Bibliography"
\r
36012 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36016 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36017 Inserts a cross-reference as described in section
\r
36018 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36022 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36024 reference "sec:Cross-References"
\r
36031 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36035 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36036 Inserts a label as described in section
\r
36037 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36041 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36043 reference "sec:Cross-References"
\r
36050 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36052 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
36055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
36062 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
36065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
36066 Longtables ! Caption
\r
36074 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36075 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
\r
36076 Floats are described in section
\r
36077 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36081 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36083 reference "sec:Floats"
\r
36087 , captions in longtables are described in the section
\r
36089 Longtable Captions
\r
36094 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36102 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36106 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36107 Inserts an index entry as described in section
\r
36108 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36114 reference "sec:Index"
\r
36121 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36122 Nomenclature Entry
\r
36125 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36126 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
\r
36127 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36133 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
\r
36140 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36144 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36146 Tables are described in section
\r
36147 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36153 reference "sec:Tables"
\r
36160 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36164 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36165 Inserts a graphic.
\r
36166 Graphics are described in section
\r
36167 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36171 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36173 reference "sec:Graphics"
\r
36180 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36184 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36185 Inserts a URL as described in section
\r
36186 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36190 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36192 reference "sub:URLs"
\r
36199 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36203 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36204 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
\r
36205 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36209 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36211 reference "sub:Hyperlinks"
\r
36218 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36222 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36223 Inserts a footnote, see section
\r
36224 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36228 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36230 reference "sec:Footnotes"
\r
36237 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36241 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36242 Inserts a marginal note, see section
\r
36243 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36247 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36249 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
\r
36256 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36260 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36261 Inserts a short title, see section
\r
36262 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36266 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36268 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
\r
36275 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36279 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36280 Inserts a TeX Code box, see section
\r
36281 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36287 reference "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
\r
36291 for a description.
\r
36294 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36296 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
36299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
36308 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36309 Inserts a program listings box.
\r
36310 Program listings are explained in the chapter
\r
36312 Program Code Listings
\r
36317 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36325 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36329 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36330 Inserts the actual date.
\r
36331 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
\r
36333 LyX offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
\r
36336 External Material
\r
36341 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36349 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36353 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36354 Inserts a preview inset, see section
\r
36355 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36359 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36361 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
\r
36365 for a description.
\r
36368 \begin_layout Section
\r
36369 The Navigate Menu
\r
36370 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
36373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
36382 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36383 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
\r
36384 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36387 of the current document.
\r
36388 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
\r
36391 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36395 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36396 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
\r
36397 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
\r
36399 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
36403 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
36407 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36411 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
\r
36412 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36415 2.5 and use the submenu
\r
36418 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36422 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36428 Then go to section
\r
36429 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36435 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36439 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36445 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
\r
36446 the key bindings
\r
36447 \begin_inset Info
\r
36449 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
\r
36453 \begin_inset Info
\r
36455 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
\r
36461 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36462 You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
\r
36463 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
\r
36466 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36467 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
\r
36470 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36471 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference following the current
\r
36475 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36479 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36480 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
\r
36481 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
\r
36482 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
\r
36486 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36490 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36498 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36502 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36503 This feature allows you to directly jump to the corresponding text part
\r
36504 in the output, see section
\r
36507 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36515 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36520 manual for a detailed description.
\r
36523 \begin_layout Section
\r
36524 The Document Menu
\r
36525 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
36528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
36537 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36541 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36542 Change Tracking is described in section
\r
36543 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36549 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
\r
36556 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
36571 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36572 After running LaTeX by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be
\r
36574 It shows the logfile of the used LaTeX-program.
\r
36577 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36578 Here you can see how LaTeX works in the background.
\r
36583 will find in it reasons for LaTeX-errors.
\r
36586 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36590 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36591 Opens the TOC/Outline window as described in section
\r
36592 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36596 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36598 reference "sec:Navigating"
\r
36603 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36605 reference "sub:Table-of-Contents"
\r
36612 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36613 Start Appendix Here
\r
36616 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36617 This menu will start the appendix of the document at the current cursor
\r
36618 position as described in section
\r
36619 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36623 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36625 reference "sec:Appendices"
\r
36632 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36636 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36637 Un/compresses the current document.
\r
36640 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36644 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36645 The document settings are described in appendix
\r
36646 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36652 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
\r
36659 \begin_layout Section
\r
36661 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
36664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
36673 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36677 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36678 Spell checking is explained in section
\r
36679 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36683 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36685 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
\r
36692 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36696 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36697 The thesaurus is described in section
\r
36698 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36704 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
\r
36711 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36713 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
36716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
36723 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
36726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
36735 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36736 Counts the words and characters in the actual document or the highlighted
\r
36740 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36742 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
36745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
36754 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36755 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your LaTeX-syst
\r
36759 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36761 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
36764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
36765 LyX ! Reconfigure|see
\r
36769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
36776 Reconfiguration of LyX
\r
36780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
36793 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
36796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
36797 Reconfiguration of LyX
\r
36805 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36806 This menu entry reconfigures LyX; that is, LyX looks for LaTeX-packages
\r
36807 and programs it needs; see also section
\r
36808 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36812 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36814 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
\r
36821 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36825 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36826 The preferences dialog is described in detail in appendix
\r
36827 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36831 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36833 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
\r
36840 \begin_layout Section
\r
36842 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
36845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
36854 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36855 This menu lists the documentation files of LyX in the language of LyX's
\r
36857 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
\r
36861 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36865 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36870 shows a LyX-document with information about the LaTeX-packages and classes
\r
36871 found by LyX (see also section
\r
36872 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36878 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
\r
36885 \begin_layout Section
\r
36887 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
36888 LatexCommand label
\r
36889 name "sec:Toolbars"
\r
36896 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36897 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
\r
36898 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36902 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36904 reference "sub:Toolbars"
\r
36911 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36912 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
\r
36913 This is described in the
\r
36915 Additional Features
\r
36920 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36922 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
36925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
36926 Toolbar ! Standard
\r
36934 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36935 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
36936 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
\r
36944 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36945 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
\r
36951 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36952 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
\r
36957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
36969 \begin_inset Note Note
\r
36972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
36973 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
\r
36978 manual for more information.
\r
36986 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36987 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
\r
36993 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36994 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
36995 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
\r
36996 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
\r
36997 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0">
\r
36998 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0">
\r
37000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37001 \begin_inset Text
\r
37003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37004 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
37005 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
\r
37015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37016 \begin_inset Text
\r
37018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37019 pull-down box for the environments
\r
37032 \begin_layout Standard
\r
37033 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
\r
37039 \begin_layout Standard
\r
37041 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
37042 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
\r
37043 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
\r
37044 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
\r
37045 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
\r
37046 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37048 \begin_inset Text
\r
37050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37053 \begin_inset Info
\r
37063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37064 \begin_inset Text
\r
37066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37069 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37076 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37078 \begin_inset Text
\r
37080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37083 \begin_inset Info
\r
37093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37094 \begin_inset Text
\r
37096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37099 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37106 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37108 \begin_inset Text
\r
37110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37113 \begin_inset Info
\r
37115 arg "buffer-write"
\r
37123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37124 \begin_inset Text
\r
37126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37129 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37136 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37138 \begin_inset Text
\r
37140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37143 \begin_inset Info
\r
37145 arg "dialog-show print"
\r
37153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37154 \begin_inset Text
\r
37156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37159 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37166 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37168 \begin_inset Text
\r
37170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37173 \begin_inset Info
\r
37175 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
\r
37183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37184 \begin_inset Text
\r
37186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37189 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37196 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37198 \begin_inset Text
\r
37200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37203 \begin_inset Info
\r
37213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37214 \begin_inset Text
\r
37216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37219 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37226 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37228 \begin_inset Text
\r
37230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37233 \begin_inset Info
\r
37243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37244 \begin_inset Text
\r
37246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37249 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37256 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37258 \begin_inset Text
\r
37260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37263 \begin_inset Info
\r
37273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37274 \begin_inset Text
\r
37276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37279 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37286 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37288 \begin_inset Text
\r
37290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37293 \begin_inset Info
\r
37303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37304 \begin_inset Text
\r
37306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37309 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37316 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37318 \begin_inset Text
\r
37320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37323 \begin_inset Info
\r
37333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37334 \begin_inset Text
\r
37336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37339 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37346 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37348 \begin_inset Text
\r
37350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37353 \begin_inset Info
\r
37355 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
\r
37363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37364 \begin_inset Text
\r
37366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37369 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37371 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
37375 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
37379 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
37388 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37390 \begin_inset Text
\r
37392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37393 \begin_inset Info
\r
37395 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
\r
37403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37404 \begin_inset Text
\r
37406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37409 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37411 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
37415 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
37419 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
37428 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37430 \begin_inset Text
\r
37432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37435 \begin_inset Info
\r
37437 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
\r
37445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37446 \begin_inset Text
\r
37448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37451 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37452 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37459 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37461 \begin_inset Text
\r
37463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37466 \begin_inset Info
\r
37476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37477 \begin_inset Text
\r
37479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37480 Emphasize text, function of the
\r
37482 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37484 \begin_inset space ~
\r
37487 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37496 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37498 \begin_inset Text
\r
37500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37503 \begin_inset Info
\r
37513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37514 \begin_inset Text
\r
37516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37517 Set text to noun style, function of the
\r
37519 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37521 \begin_inset space ~
\r
37524 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37533 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37535 \begin_inset Text
\r
37537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37540 \begin_inset Info
\r
37542 arg "textstyle-apply"
\r
37550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37551 \begin_inset Text
\r
37553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37554 Format text using the current settings in the
\r
37556 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37558 \begin_inset space ~
\r
37561 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37570 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37572 \begin_inset Text
\r
37574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37577 \begin_inset Info
\r
37587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37588 \begin_inset Text
\r
37590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37593 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37594 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37596 \begin_inset space ~
\r
37605 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37607 \begin_inset Text
\r
37609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37612 \begin_inset Info
\r
37614 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
\r
37622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37623 \begin_inset Text
\r
37625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37628 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37635 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37637 \begin_inset Text
\r
37639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37640 \begin_inset Info
\r
37642 arg "tabular-insert"
\r
37650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37651 \begin_inset Text
\r
37653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37656 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37663 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37665 \begin_inset Text
\r
37667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37670 \begin_inset Info
\r
37672 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
\r
37680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37681 \begin_inset Text
\r
37683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37684 Toggle outline window on/off,
\r
37686 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37693 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37695 \begin_inset Text
\r
37697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37700 \begin_inset Info
\r
37702 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
\r
37710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37711 \begin_inset Text
\r
37713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37714 Toggle math toolbar on/off
\r
37720 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37722 \begin_inset Text
\r
37724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37727 \begin_inset Info
\r
37729 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
\r
37737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37738 \begin_inset Text
\r
37740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37741 Toggle table toolbar on/off
\r
37754 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
37756 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
37759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37768 \begin_layout Standard
\r
37769 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
37770 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
\r
37778 \begin_layout Standard
\r
37779 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
\r
37785 \begin_layout Standard
\r
37786 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
\r
37790 \begin_layout Standard
\r
37791 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
\r
37797 \begin_layout Standard
\r
37798 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
37799 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
\r
37800 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
\r
37801 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
\r
37802 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
\r
37803 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37805 \begin_inset Text
\r
37807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37810 \begin_inset Info
\r
37820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37821 \begin_inset Text
\r
37823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37830 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37832 \begin_inset Text
\r
37834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37837 \begin_inset Info
\r
37839 arg "layout Enumerate"
\r
37847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37848 \begin_inset Text
\r
37850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37857 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37859 \begin_inset Text
\r
37861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37864 \begin_inset Info
\r
37866 arg "layout Itemize"
\r
37874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37875 \begin_inset Text
\r
37877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37884 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37886 \begin_inset Text
\r
37888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37891 \begin_inset Info
\r
37893 arg "layout List"
\r
37901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37902 \begin_inset Text
\r
37904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37911 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37913 \begin_inset Text
\r
37915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37918 \begin_inset Info
\r
37920 arg "layout Description"
\r
37928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37929 \begin_inset Text
\r
37931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37938 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37940 \begin_inset Text
\r
37942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37945 \begin_inset Info
\r
37947 arg "depth-increment"
\r
37955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37956 \begin_inset Text
\r
37958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37961 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37963 \begin_inset space ~
\r
37967 \begin_inset space ~
\r
37976 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37978 \begin_inset Text
\r
37980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37983 \begin_inset Info
\r
37985 arg "depth-decrement"
\r
37993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37994 \begin_inset Text
\r
37996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37999 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38001 \begin_inset space ~
\r
38005 \begin_inset space ~
\r
38014 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38016 \begin_inset Text
\r
38018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38021 \begin_inset Info
\r
38023 arg "float-insert figure"
\r
38031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38032 \begin_inset Text
\r
38034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38037 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38038 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38045 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38047 \begin_inset Text
\r
38049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38052 \begin_inset Info
\r
38054 arg "float-insert table"
\r
38062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38063 \begin_inset Text
\r
38065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38068 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38069 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38076 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38078 \begin_inset Text
\r
38080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38083 \begin_inset Info
\r
38085 arg "label-insert"
\r
38093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38094 \begin_inset Text
\r
38096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38099 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38106 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38108 \begin_inset Text
\r
38110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38113 \begin_inset Info
\r
38115 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
\r
38123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38124 \begin_inset Text
\r
38126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38129 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38136 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38138 \begin_inset Text
\r
38140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38143 \begin_inset Info
\r
38145 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
\r
38153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38154 \begin_inset Text
\r
38156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38159 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38166 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38168 \begin_inset Text
\r
38170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38173 \begin_inset Info
\r
38175 arg "index-insert"
\r
38183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38184 \begin_inset Text
\r
38186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38189 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38191 \begin_inset space ~
\r
38200 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38202 \begin_inset Text
\r
38204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38207 \begin_inset Info
\r
38209 arg "nomencl-insert"
\r
38217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38218 \begin_inset Text
\r
38220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38223 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38225 \begin_inset space ~
\r
38234 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38236 \begin_inset Text
\r
38238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38241 \begin_inset Info
\r
38243 arg "footnote-insert"
\r
38251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38252 \begin_inset Text
\r
38254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38257 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38264 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38266 \begin_inset Text
\r
38268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38271 \begin_inset Info
\r
38273 arg "marginalnote-insert"
\r
38281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38282 \begin_inset Text
\r
38284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38287 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38289 \begin_inset space ~
\r
38298 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38300 \begin_inset Text
\r
38302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38305 \begin_inset Info
\r
38307 arg "note-insert"
\r
38315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38316 \begin_inset Text
\r
38318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38321 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38322 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38335 \begin_inset space ~
\r
38344 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38346 \begin_inset Text
\r
38348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38351 \begin_inset Info
\r
38353 arg "box-insert Frameless"
\r
38361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38362 \begin_inset Text
\r
38364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38367 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38374 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38376 \begin_inset Text
\r
38378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38381 \begin_inset Info
\r
38383 arg "href-insert"
\r
38391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38392 \begin_inset Text
\r
38394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38397 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38404 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38406 \begin_inset Text
\r
38408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38411 \begin_inset Info
\r
38421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38422 \begin_inset Text
\r
38424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38427 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38444 \begin_inset space ~
\r
38453 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38455 \begin_inset Text
\r
38457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38460 \begin_inset Info
\r
38462 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
\r
38470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38471 \begin_inset Text
\r
38473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38476 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38477 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38484 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38486 \begin_inset Text
\r
38488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38491 \begin_inset Info
\r
38493 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
\r
38501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38502 \begin_inset Text
\r
38504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38507 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38508 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38510 \begin_inset space ~
\r
38519 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38521 \begin_inset Text
\r
38523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38526 \begin_inset Info
\r
38528 arg "dialog-show character"
\r
38536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38537 \begin_inset Text
\r
38539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38542 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38544 \begin_inset space ~
\r
38547 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38554 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38556 \begin_inset Text
\r
38558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38561 \begin_inset Info
\r
38563 arg "layout-paragraph"
\r
38571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38572 \begin_inset Text
\r
38574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38577 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38579 \begin_inset space ~
\r
38588 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38590 \begin_inset Text
\r
38592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38595 \begin_inset Info
\r
38597 arg "thesaurus-entry"
\r
38605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38606 \begin_inset Text
\r
38608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38611 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38625 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
38626 View/Update Toolbar
\r
38627 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
38630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38631 Toolbar ! View / Update
\r
38639 \begin_layout Standard
\r
38640 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
38641 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
\r
38648 \begin_layout Standard
\r
38649 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
\r
38655 \begin_layout Standard
\r
38656 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
\r
38660 \begin_layout Standard
\r
38661 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
\r
38667 \begin_layout Standard
\r
38668 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
38669 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
\r
38670 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
\r
38671 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
\r
38672 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
\r
38673 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38675 \begin_inset Text
\r
38677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38680 \begin_inset Info
\r
38682 arg "buffer-view"
\r
38690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38691 \begin_inset Text
\r
38693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38696 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38703 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38705 \begin_inset Text
\r
38707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38710 \begin_inset Info
\r
38712 arg "buffer-update"
\r
38720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38721 \begin_inset Text
\r
38723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38726 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38733 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38735 \begin_inset Text
\r
38737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38740 \begin_inset Info
\r
38742 arg "master-buffer-view"
\r
38750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38751 \begin_inset Text
\r
38753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38756 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38758 \begin_inset space ~
\r
38767 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38769 \begin_inset Text
\r
38771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38774 \begin_inset Info
\r
38776 arg "master-buffer-update"
\r
38784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38785 \begin_inset Text
\r
38787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38790 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38792 \begin_inset space ~
\r
38796 \begin_inset space ~
\r
38805 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38807 \begin_inset Text
\r
38809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38812 \begin_inset Info
\r
38814 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
\r
38822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38823 \begin_inset Text
\r
38825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38828 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38829 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38830 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38831 Synchronize with Output
\r
38837 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38839 \begin_inset Text
\r
38841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38842 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
38843 filename ../images/view-others.png
\r
38845 groupId toolbarbuttons
\r
38856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38857 \begin_inset Text
\r
38859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38862 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38863 View (Other Formats)
\r
38869 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38871 \begin_inset Text
\r
38873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38874 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
38875 filename ../images/update-others.png
\r
38877 groupId toolbarbuttons
\r
38886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38887 \begin_inset Text
\r
38889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38892 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38893 Update (Other Formats)
\r
38906 \begin_layout Standard
\r
38907 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
\r
38911 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
38915 \begin_layout Standard
\r
38916 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
\r
38917 \begin_inset space ~
\r
38921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
38923 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
\r
38927 , the table toolbar
\r
38928 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
38931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38940 \begin_inset space ~
\r
38945 manual and the math macro toolbar
\r
38946 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
38949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38962 \begin_layout Chapter
\r
38963 The Document Settings
\r
38964 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
38965 LatexCommand label
\r
38966 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
\r
38971 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
38974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38975 Document ! Settings
\r
38983 \begin_layout Standard
\r
38984 The document settings dialog contains submenus to set properties for the
\r
38985 whole document and is called with the menu
\r
38987 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38991 You can save your document settings as default with the
\r
38993 Save as Document Defaults
\r
38995 button in the dialog.
\r
38996 This will create a template named
\r
38997 \family typewriter
\r
39000 which is automatically loaded by LyX when you create a new document without
\r
39001 using a template.
\r
39004 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39007 Use Class Defaults
\r
39009 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
\r
39010 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
\r
39013 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39014 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
\r
39017 \begin_layout Section
\r
39021 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39022 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
\r
39024 Document classes are described in section
\r
39025 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39029 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
39031 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
\r
39039 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39043 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39048 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in LyX's
\r
39052 folder and thus not recognized by LyX as layout for a document class.
\r
39053 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
\r
39055 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
\r
39064 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39065 Some classes use special class options by default.
\r
39066 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
\r
39070 and you can decide to use them or not.
\r
39071 If you do not exactly know what the default class options are for, it is
\r
39072 recommended to leave them untouched.
\r
39077 is used for LaTeX's graphics, color and page layout packages.
\r
39082 , the default driver for the LaTeX-packages is used.
\r
39083 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
\r
39085 \begin_inset Foot
\r
39088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39089 When you want to use one of the following drivers
\r
39090 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
39095 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
\r
39098 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
39101 you first have to activate them in your LaTeX distribution, see section
\r
39107 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
39108 LatexCommand href
\r
39109 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
\r
39121 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39122 Specifying a master document is necessary if the current document is a child
\r
39124 The master document will be used by LyX in the background if the child
\r
39125 document is opened without its master.
\r
39126 This way child documents are always compilable.
\r
39127 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
\r
39134 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39142 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39143 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the LaTeX-package
\r
39153 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
39156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39157 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
\r
39163 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
39166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39167 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
\r
39172 for cross-references, see sec.
\r
39173 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
39177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
39179 reference "sec:Cross-References"
\r
39186 \begin_layout Section
\r
39190 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39191 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
\r
39192 Please refer to the section
\r
39195 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39203 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39208 manual for details.
\r
39211 \begin_layout Section
\r
39215 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39216 Modules are explained in section
\r
39217 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39221 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
39223 reference "sub:Modules"
\r
39230 \begin_layout Section
\r
39234 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39236 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
39242 reference "sub:Local-Layout"
\r
39246 for a description.
\r
39249 \begin_layout Section
\r
39253 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39254 The document font settings are described in section
\r
39255 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
39261 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
\r
39268 \begin_layout Section
\r
39272 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39273 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by indentations or vertical
\r
39275 The line spacing and the number of text columns can also be specified here.
\r
39278 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39279 Note that LyX will not show two columns or the set up line spacing on screen.
\r
39280 That would be impractical, often unreadable and is not part of the WYSIWYM
\r
39282 However, it will be as you specified it in the output.
\r
39285 \begin_layout Section
\r
39289 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39290 A description of this menu is given in section
\r
39291 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
39297 reference "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
\r
39302 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
39304 reference "sub:Document-Layout"
\r
39311 \begin_layout Section
\r
39315 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39316 Here you can adjust the paper margins, see section
\r
39317 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
39323 reference "sub:Margins"
\r
39330 \begin_layout Section
\r
39332 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
39333 LatexCommand label
\r
39334 name "sec:Language-encodings"
\r
39339 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
39342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39343 Language ! Encoding
\r
39351 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39352 The document language and quote styles are set here.
\r
39353 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to LaTeX (the
\r
39354 LyX file is always encoded in utf8).
\r
39355 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
\r
39356 be exported as LaTeX-commands (this can fail if a LaTeX-command is not
\r
39357 known for a particular character).
\r
39358 \begin_inset Foot
\r
39361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39362 The known commands are defined in a text file (
\r
39367 You can add commands for unknown symbols to that file yourself, see the
\r
39372 manual for details.
\r
39380 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39381 If you use the option
\r
39385 , LyX determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
\r
39386 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
\r
39387 than one encoding in the LaTeX file.
\r
39388 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
\r
39389 exactly one encoding.
\r
39390 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
\r
39393 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39394 LyX also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
\r
39395 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
\r
39396 If you want to use this (and your LaTeX installation supports Unicode),
\r
39397 choose one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
\r
39398 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard LaTeX is quite incomplete,
\r
39399 so it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
\r
39404 (when LyX uses its list of known LaTeX-commands), but does not work with
\r
39405 a fixed utf8 encoding (when the list of known LaTeX-commands is not used,
\r
39406 because all Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
\r
39407 The situation is much better with XeTeX and LuaTeX, two new alternative
\r
39408 engines to standard LaTeX.
\r
39409 Both engines support Unicode natively.
\r
39410 LyX now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
\r
39413 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39432 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39451 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39457 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39461 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
39463 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
\r
39468 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
\r
39472 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
\r
39475 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39479 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39484 determines the LaTeX-package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
\r
39486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
39490 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
39494 The possible settings are:
\r
39497 \begin_layout Description
\r
39498 Default uses the language package that is selected in
\r
39500 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
39501 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
39502 Language Settings
\r
39505 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39509 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
39511 reference "sub:Prefs-Language"
\r
39518 \begin_layout Description
\r
39519 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
\r
39520 format you will use.
\r
39521 In many cases this will be
\r
39526 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
39529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39530 LaTeX-packages ! babel
\r
39536 If the newer package
\r
39541 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
39544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39545 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
\r
39550 is more appropriate (is the case when using XeTeX and/or non-TeX fonts),
\r
39551 this package will be used instead of
\r
39558 \begin_layout Description
\r
39560 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39571 would be more appropriate.
\r
39574 \begin_layout Description
\r
39575 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
\r
39576 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
\r
39580 (for German texts), type in
\r
39583 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
39588 usepackage{ngerman}
\r
39591 \begin_layout Description
\r
39592 None will not use a language package.
\r
39593 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
\r
39596 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39597 Here is a list with the important encodings:
\r
39600 \begin_layout Description
\r
39602 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39606 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39610 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39613 inputenc) Same as
\r
39617 , but the LaTeX-package
\r
39622 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
39625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39626 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
\r
39632 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
\r
39633 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
\r
39634 languages in TeX code.
\r
39637 \begin_layout Description
\r
39638 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
\r
39639 LyX converts all other characters into LaTeX commands, which may result
\r
39640 in a big file when lots of LaTeX-commands are needed.
\r
39643 \begin_layout Description
\r
39645 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39649 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39652 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
\r
39655 \begin_layout Description
\r
39657 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39661 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39664 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
\r
39667 \begin_layout Description
\r
39669 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39672 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
\r
39675 \begin_layout Description
\r
39677 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39681 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39684 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
\r
39685 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
\r
39688 \begin_layout Description
\r
39690 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39694 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39697 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
\r
39701 \begin_layout Description
\r
39703 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39707 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39710 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
\r
39711 ISO-8859-13 encoding
\r
39714 \begin_layout Description
\r
39716 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39720 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39724 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39727 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
\r
39728 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39734 \begin_layout Description
\r
39736 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39740 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39744 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39747 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
\r
39748 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
\r
39751 \begin_layout Description
\r
39753 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39757 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39760 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
\r
39761 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
\r
39762 is not available for LaTeX you should try to use the encoding Unicode
\r
39763 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39767 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39773 \begin_layout Description
\r
39775 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39779 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39782 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
\r
39783 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
\r
39784 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for LaTeX
\r
39785 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
\r
39786 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39790 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39796 \begin_layout Description
\r
39798 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39802 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39805 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
\r
39808 \begin_layout Description
\r
39810 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39814 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39817 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
\r
39820 \begin_layout Description
\r
39822 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39826 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39829 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
\r
39832 \begin_layout Description
\r
39834 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39837 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
\r
39840 \begin_layout Description
\r
39842 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39845 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
\r
39848 \begin_layout Description
\r
39850 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39854 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39857 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
\r
39860 \begin_layout Description
\r
39862 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39866 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39869 8859-7) for Greek
\r
39872 \begin_layout Description
\r
39874 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39878 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39881 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
\r
39884 \begin_layout Description
\r
39886 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39890 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39893 8859-8) for Hebrew
\r
39896 \begin_layout Description
\r
39898 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39902 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39905 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
\r
39910 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
39913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39914 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
\r
39919 , when using this, set the document language to
\r
39924 \begin_layout Description
\r
39926 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39930 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39933 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
\r
39937 , when using this, set the document language to
\r
39940 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39946 \begin_layout Description
\r
39948 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39952 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39955 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
\r
39960 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
39963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39964 LaTeX-packages ! japanese
\r
39969 , when using this, set the document language to
\r
39974 \begin_layout Description
\r
39976 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39980 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39983 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
\r
39987 , when using this, set the document language to
\r
39992 \begin_layout Description
\r
39994 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39998 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40001 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
\r
40005 , when using this, set the document language to
\r
40010 \begin_layout Description
\r
40012 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40015 (EUC-KR) for Korean
\r
40018 \begin_layout Description
\r
40020 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40024 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40028 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40031 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
\r
40034 \begin_layout Description
\r
40036 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40040 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40044 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40047 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
\r
40048 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
\r
40049 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
\r
40052 \begin_layout Description
\r
40054 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40058 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40064 \begin_layout Description
\r
40066 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40070 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40073 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
\r
40074 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
\r
40077 \begin_layout Description
\r
40079 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40083 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40086 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the LaTeX-package
\r
40091 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
40094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
40095 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
\r
40100 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
\r
40103 \begin_layout Description
\r
40105 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40109 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40112 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
\r
40120 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the LaTeX-package
\r
40125 LyX automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview XeTeX
\r
40127 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
\r
40130 \begin_layout Description
\r
40132 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40136 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40139 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
\r
40144 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
40147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
40148 LaTeX-packages ! ucs
\r
40153 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
\r
40156 \begin_layout Description
\r
40158 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40161 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
\r
40166 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
40169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
40170 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
\r
40176 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
\r
40180 \begin_layout Description
\r
40182 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40186 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40190 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40193 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
\r
40194 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40200 \begin_layout Description
\r
40202 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40206 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40210 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40213 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
\r
40214 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
\r
40215 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
\r
40219 \begin_layout Description
\r
40221 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40225 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40229 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40232 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
\r
40233 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
\r
40236 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40237 Finally, the dialog lets you select a specific language package for the
\r
40238 current document.
\r
40240 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
40244 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
40246 reference "sub:Prefs-Language"
\r
40250 for more information on the language package.
\r
40253 \begin_layout Section
\r
40255 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
40258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
40259 Color ! main text
\r
40265 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
40268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
40269 Color ! background
\r
40277 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40278 Here you can alter the font color for the main text (default: black) and
\r
40280 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40283 out notes (default: light grey).
\r
40288 sets the color back to the default.
\r
40291 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40292 You can also change the background color for the pages (default: white)
\r
40294 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40297 boxes (default: red).
\r
40300 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40301 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
40304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
40305 The colors are not shown within LyX, only in the output.
\r
40307 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40310 out note appears blue in the output.)
\r
40318 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40319 Note, if you change the main text font color and use the option
\r
40322 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40327 in the document settings under
\r
40330 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40335 , you probably also need to change the link font color by using
\r
40338 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40346 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40352 For example the option
\r
40355 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40361 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40362 sets the link text color to black.
\r
40363 For more information, see the manual of the LaTeX-package
\r
40368 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
40371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
40372 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
\r
40378 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
40379 LatexCommand cite
\r
40387 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40388 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
\r
40394 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40395 You can adapt the main text font color and the page background for every
\r
40396 page in your document if you use these commands as TeX
\r
40397 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40400 Code behind a forced page break:
\r
40403 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
40404 For the page color:
\r
40405 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
40412 pagecolor{color name}
\r
40415 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
40416 For the text color:
\r
40417 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
40424 color{color name}
\r
40427 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40428 The color name can hereby be one of these:
\r
40461 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
40464 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use them under the
\r
40468 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
40469 For the page background color:
\r
40470 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
40475 page_backgroundcolor
\r
40478 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
40479 For the main text color:
\r
40480 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
40485 document_fontcolor
\r
40488 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
40490 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40493 box background color:
\r
40494 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
40502 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
40504 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40507 out note text color:
\r
40508 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
40516 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40517 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
\r
40520 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40528 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40536 \begin_layout Section
\r
40540 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40541 Here you can adjust the numbering depth of section headings and the section
\r
40542 depth in the table of contents as described in section
\r
40543 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
40549 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
\r
40556 \begin_layout Section
\r
40560 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40561 Here you can specify a citation style using the LaTeX packages
\r
40566 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
40569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
40570 LaTeX-packages ! natbib
\r
40580 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
40583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
40584 LaTeX-packages ! jurabib
\r
40590 You can enable a sectioned bibliography using the LaTeX package
\r
40595 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
40598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
40599 LaTeX-packages ! bibtopic
\r
40604 and you can customize how the bibliography of the given document is being
\r
40606 For a further description see section
\r
40607 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40611 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
40613 reference "sec:Bibliography"
\r
40620 \begin_layout Section
\r
40624 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40625 Here, you can customize how the index of your document is being generated
\r
40626 and you can define additional indexes.
\r
40627 Please refer to section
\r
40628 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
40634 reference "sec:Index"
\r
40641 \begin_layout Section
\r
40645 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40646 The PDF properties are explained in section
\r
40647 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
40653 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
\r
40660 \begin_layout Section
\r
40664 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40665 These options will force LyX to use the LaTeX-packages
\r
40670 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
40673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
40674 LaTeX-packages ! amsmath
\r
40684 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
40687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
40688 LaTeX-packages ! esint
\r
40698 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
40701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
40702 LaTeX-packages ! mathdots
\r
40712 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
40715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
40716 LaTeX-packages ! mhchem
\r
40721 or to use them automatically when they are needed.
\r
40724 \begin_layout Description
\r
40725 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get LaTeX-errors in formulas,
\r
40726 ensure that you have enabled
\r
40729 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40737 \begin_layout Description
\r
40738 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
\r
40741 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40753 \begin_layout Description
\r
40754 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
\r
40765 \begin_layout Description
\r
40766 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
\r
40768 Chemical Symbols and Equations
\r
40777 \begin_layout Section
\r
40781 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40782 The float placement options are described in section
\r
40785 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40793 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40801 \begin_layout Section
\r
40805 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40806 The listings settings are explained in chapter
\r
40808 Program Code Listings
\r
40813 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40821 \begin_layout Section
\r
40825 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40826 Here you can adjust the characters for the itemize levels.
\r
40827 The itemize environment is described in section
\r
40828 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40832 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
40834 reference "sec:Itemize"
\r
40841 \begin_layout Section
\r
40845 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40846 Branches are described in section
\r
40847 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40851 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
40853 reference "sec:Branches"
\r
40860 \begin_layout Section
\r
40862 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
40863 LatexCommand label
\r
40864 name "sec:Doc-Output"
\r
40871 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40872 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
\r
40875 \begin_layout Description
\r
40877 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40881 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40884 Format: The format that is used when you hit
\r
40885 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
40889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
40893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
40897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
40901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
40904 View Master Document
\r
40905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
40909 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
40912 Update Master Document
\r
40913 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
40920 menu or the toolbar.
\r
40921 The default is set in
\r
40923 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
40924 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
40928 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
40932 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
40934 reference "sec:File-Formats"
\r
40941 \begin_layout Description
\r
40943 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40947 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40950 Output settings for the menu
\r
40952 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
40954 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40960 For a detailed description see section
\r
40962 Reverse DVI/PDF search
\r
40967 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40975 \begin_layout Description
\r
40977 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40981 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40984 Options settings for the export format
\r
40992 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40997 will assure that the output follows exactly version
\r
40998 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41001 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
\r
41005 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41010 settings are described in detail in section
\r
41012 Math Output in XHTML
\r
41017 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41023 The scaling is used for the size of equations in the output.
\r
41026 \begin_layout Section
\r
41031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
41041 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41042 In this text field you can enter commands to load special LaTeX-packages
\r
41043 or to define LaTeX-commands.
\r
41044 The preamble is a thing for LaTeX-experts.
\r
41045 You should not enter commands here until you exactly know what you are
\r
41049 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41050 An introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
\r
41051 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41055 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
41057 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
\r
41064 \begin_layout Chapter
\r
41070 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
41071 LatexCommand label
\r
41072 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
\r
41077 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
41080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
41089 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41090 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
\r
41092 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
41096 It has the following submenus.
\r
41099 \begin_layout Section
\r
41103 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
41107 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
41108 User Interface File
\r
41109 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
41112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
41113 Customization ! of toolbars
\r
41119 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
41122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
41123 Customization ! of menus
\r
41131 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41132 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
\r
41133 interface (ui) file.
\r
41134 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
\r
41139 loads three files:
\r
41142 \begin_layout Description
\r
41147 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
\r
41150 \begin_layout Description
\r
41157 the menu entries in popup context menus
\r
41160 \begin_layout Description
\r
41165 specifies the toolbar buttons
\r
41168 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41169 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
\r
41170 and edit the entries.
\r
41173 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41174 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
\r
41186 entries must be finished with an explicit
\r
41191 They may contain
\r
41211 and in the case of the
\r
41212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
41216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
41224 The syntax for the entries is:
\r
41227 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41228 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
\r
41234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
41242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
41246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
41250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
41256 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41258 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
\r
41261 All the LyX-functions are listed in the menu
\r
41263 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
41268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
41276 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41284 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41285 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
\r
41291 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41292 For example, assuming you use the menu
\r
41294 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
41297 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
\r
41301 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41302 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
\r
41308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
41312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
41316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
41320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
41326 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41328 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
\r
41332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
41335 navigate_bookmarks
\r
41336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
41343 to have the sixth bookmark.
\r
41346 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41350 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41355 allows you to change the appearance of LyX's toolbar buttons.
\r
41356 The currently available icon sets are compared in
\r
41357 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
41358 LatexCommand href
\r
41359 name "this image"
\r
41360 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
\r
41367 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
41371 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41374 Enable tool tips in main work area
\r
41376 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
\r
41380 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
41384 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41387 Restore window layouts and geometries
\r
41389 LyX's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used
\r
41390 in the last LyX session.
\r
41393 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41396 Restore cursor positions
\r
41398 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
\r
41399 the last session.
\r
41402 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41405 Load opened files from last session
\r
41407 opens all files that were opened in the last LyX session.
\r
41410 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41413 Clear all session information
\r
41415 deletes all information from previous LyX sessions (cursor positions, names
\r
41416 of last opened documents, etc.).
\r
41419 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
41421 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
41422 LatexCommand label
\r
41423 name "sub:Backup documents"
\r
41428 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
41431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
41432 Backup ! Documents
\r
41440 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41443 Backup original documents when saving
\r
41445 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
\r
41446 it was saved the last time.
\r
41447 It is stored in the
\r
41450 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41456 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41460 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
41462 reference "sec:Paths"
\r
41466 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
\r
41469 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41475 The backup file has the file extension
\r
41476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
41484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
41490 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41493 Backup documents, every
\r
41495 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
\r
41498 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41501 Save documents compressed by default
\r
41503 always saves files in a compressed format.
\r
41506 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41509 Maximum last files
\r
41511 is the number of last opened files that LyX should display in the menu
\r
41514 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
41516 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41527 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41530 Open documents in tabs
\r
41532 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of LyX.
\r
41535 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41540 is only active if a LyXServer pipe
\r
41541 \begin_inset Foot
\r
41544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
41546 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
41550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
41552 reference "sec:Paths"
\r
41556 for information about LyXServer pipes.
\r
41562 If it is checked, LyX documents will be opened in the same running instance
\r
41564 Otherwise a new LyX instance is created for each file.
\r
41567 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41570 Single close-tab button
\r
41572 is checked, there will only be one close button (
\r
41575 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
41576 filename ../images/closetab.png
\r
41583 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
\r
41584 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
\r
41587 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41588 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
41591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
41596 For the last option you have to restart LyX before the change takes effect.
\r
41604 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
41606 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
41609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
41616 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
41617 LatexCommand label
\r
41618 name "sub:Screen-Fonts"
\r
41625 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41626 These fonts are used to display your documents within LyX.
\r
41629 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41630 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
41633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
41638 This section only deals with the fonts
\r
41643 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
\r
41646 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
41647 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
41658 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41659 By default, LyX uses
\r
41660 \family typewriter
\r
41668 \family typewriter
\r
41672 \family typewriter
\r
41675 (depends on the system) as its
\r
41678 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41684 \family typewriter
\r
41688 \family typewriter
\r
41694 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41695 You can change the font size with the
\r
41702 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41707 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
\r
41709 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
41712 points have the size of 1
\r
41713 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
41716 inch, see Appendix
\r
41717 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
41723 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
\r
41728 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
\r
41729 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
41733 The sizes are explained in detail in section
\r
41734 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41738 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
41740 reference "sub:Document-Font"
\r
41747 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41750 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
\r
41752 enabled, LyX needs to redraw the screen less often.
\r
41753 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
\r
41754 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
\r
41755 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
\r
41757 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
\r
41758 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41764 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
41766 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
41769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
41770 Color ! LyX screen
\r
41776 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
41779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
41788 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41789 Here you can change the screen colors used by LyX by choosing an item in
\r
41790 the list and selecting the
\r
41797 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41798 By checking the option
\r
41800 Use system colors
\r
41802 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
\r
41805 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
\r
41806 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41810 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41815 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
\r
41818 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
41820 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
41823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
41824 Settings ! Display
\r
41832 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41833 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside LyX.
\r
41836 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41841 enables previewing snippets of your document.
\r
41842 This feature is described in section
\r
41843 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
41849 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
\r
41856 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41857 Checking the option
\r
41860 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41864 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41868 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41873 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
\r
41876 \begin_layout Section
\r
41878 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
41881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
41882 Settings ! Editing
\r
41890 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
41894 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
41898 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41901 Cursor follows scrollbar
\r
41903 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
\r
41907 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41908 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
\r
41909 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
\r
41910 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
\r
41913 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41916 Scroll below end of document
\r
41918 is self-explanatory.
\r
41921 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41922 In LyX one can jump from word to word by pressing
\r
41929 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
\r
41931 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
\r
41932 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
\r
41935 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41938 Sort environments alphabetically
\r
41940 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
\r
41943 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41946 Group environments by their category
\r
41948 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
\r
41951 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41956 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
\r
41967 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
41971 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41972 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
\r
41977 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
\r
41978 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
\r
41979 appears centered.
\r
41982 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
41984 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
41987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
41994 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
41997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
41998 Settings ! Shortcuts
\r
42006 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42011 specifies the file to be used to bind a LyX-function to a key.
\r
42012 Several binding files are available, among them:
\r
42015 \begin_layout Description
\r
42016 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
\r
42019 \begin_layout Description
\r
42020 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
\r
42032 \begin_layout Description
\r
42033 mac.bind a set of bindings for
\r
42036 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
42044 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42045 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
\r
42050 , and binding files for special languages.
\r
42051 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
\r
42052 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
42056 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
42060 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
42064 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
42068 If you use LyX in a certain language, LyX will try to use the appropriate
\r
42072 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42073 Some binding files, like
\r
42077 , only have a limited scope.
\r
42078 When looking at the end of the file
\r
42082 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
\r
42085 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42089 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42097 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42102 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
\r
42103 in the selected key binding file.
\r
42106 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
42107 Editing Shortcuts
\r
42108 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
42109 LatexCommand label
\r
42110 name "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
\r
42115 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
42118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
42119 Key Bindings ! Editing
\r
42127 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42128 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
\r
42129 the table in the dialog that lists all LyX-functions and the bound shortcuts.
\r
42130 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
\r
42131 provides the field
\r
42133 Show key-bindings containing
\r
42136 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
\r
42137 Insert there for example as keyword
\r
42138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
42142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
42145 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
\r
42146 functions that contain
\r
42147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
42151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
42155 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
\r
42156 All LyX-functions are also listed in the file
\r
42160 that you will find in the
\r
42167 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42168 For example, to add the shortcut
\r
42172 for the function
\r
42176 , select the function and press the
\r
42181 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
\r
42182 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
\r
42185 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42186 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
\r
42187 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the LyX
\r
42188 Function definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the
\r
42189 different function names as a semicolon separated list.
\r
42190 LyX will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
\r
42195 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42196 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
\r
42199 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42200 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
\r
42202 The syntax of the entries is:
\r
42205 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
42215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
42219 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
42223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
42229 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
42231 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
42232 LatexCommand label
\r
42233 name "sub:Keyboard-Map"
\r
42238 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
42241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
42248 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
42251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
42252 Settings ! Keyboard Map
\r
42260 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42261 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
\r
42262 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, LyX provides keyboard maps.
\r
42263 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
\r
42264 is a Romanian one, you can enable
\r
42267 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42271 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42276 and select the keyboard map file named
\r
42283 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42284 You can specify a
\r
42292 keyboard map and, if you use the
\r
42296 bindings, you can select the first and second with
\r
42297 \begin_inset Info
\r
42299 arg "keymap-primary"
\r
42303 \begin_inset Info
\r
42305 arg "keymap-secondary"
\r
42308 respectively or toggle between them with
\r
42309 \begin_inset Info
\r
42311 arg "keymap-toggle"
\r
42317 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42318 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
42321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
42326 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
\r
42335 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42336 You can also specify the mouse
\r
42338 Wheel scrolling speed
\r
42341 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
\r
42345 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42353 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42357 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42362 you can select a key for zooming.
\r
42363 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
\r
42366 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
42370 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42371 Input completion is described in section
\r
42372 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
42378 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
\r
42385 \begin_layout Section
\r
42387 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
42388 LatexCommand label
\r
42394 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
42397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
42404 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
42407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
42416 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42417 The paths to the various resources used by LyX are normally determined during
\r
42418 the installation.
\r
42419 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
\r
42422 \begin_layout Description
\r
42424 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42427 directory This is LyX's working directory.
\r
42428 It is the default when you
\r
42439 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42447 \begin_layout Description
\r
42449 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42452 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
\r
42454 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
42456 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42460 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42468 \begin_layout Description
\r
42470 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42473 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
\r
42479 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
42483 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
42487 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
42490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
42499 button does not exist when using LyX on Mac OS and Windows systems.
\r
42507 \begin_layout Description
\r
42509 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42513 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
42516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
42517 Backup ! Directory
\r
42522 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
\r
42523 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
\r
42524 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42528 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
42530 reference "sub:Backup documents"
\r
42536 Working directory
\r
42538 will be used to save the backups.
\r
42539 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
42542 Backup files have the ending
\r
42543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
42547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
42553 \begin_layout Description
\r
42558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
42566 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42569 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
\r
42570 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to LyX.
\r
42571 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
42578 You add a BibTeX-database
\r
42582 to your document.
\r
42583 You can edit this file with the program
\r
42584 \family typewriter
\r
42589 \family typewriter
\r
42592 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for LyX in its preferences under
\r
42595 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42601 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
\r
42603 \family typewriter
\r
42606 and click on the LyX-symbol.
\r
42607 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
\r
42608 in your LyX file.
\r
42610 \family typewriter
\r
42613 and LyX need to be running the same time.
\r
42614 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
42617 The pipe is also used for the
\r
42625 feature, see sec.
\r
42626 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
42630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
42632 reference "sub:Backup documents"
\r
42637 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
42640 To use the LyXServer-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
\r
42641 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
42657 \begin_layout Description
\r
42659 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42662 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
\r
42665 \begin_layout Description
\r
42667 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42670 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
\r
42671 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
\r
42672 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
\r
42675 \begin_layout Description
\r
42677 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42680 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
\r
42682 \family typewriter
\r
42686 You only need to specify it if you are using
\r
42687 \family typewriter
\r
42690 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
\r
42692 For LyX on Windows
\r
42693 \family typewriter
\r
42696 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
\r
42700 \begin_layout Description
\r
42702 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42705 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
\r
42706 When LyX needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see
\r
42707 where to find it on the system.
\r
42708 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when LyX
\r
42709 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
\r
42711 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
42715 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
42718 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
\r
42719 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
\r
42722 \begin_layout Description
\r
42724 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42727 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
\r
42728 which are included in a LyX document via commands in TeX code or in the
\r
42729 document preamble.
\r
42730 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
\r
42731 a single dot '.').
\r
42732 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
\r
42733 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
\r
42734 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
\r
42735 scanned for the input files.
\r
42736 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
\r
42737 to be relative to the directory of your LyX file.
\r
42738 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
\r
42739 compilation may fail for some documents.
\r
42742 \begin_layout Section
\r
42746 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42747 Here you can insert your
\r
42756 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
\r
42758 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
42764 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
\r
42768 , to mark changes you make as yours.
\r
42771 \begin_layout Section
\r
42772 Language Settings
\r
42773 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
42776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
42777 Language ! Settings
\r
42783 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
42786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
42787 Settings ! Language
\r
42795 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
42797 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
42798 LatexCommand label
\r
42799 name "sub:Prefs-Language"
\r
42806 \begin_layout Description
\r
42808 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42812 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42815 language Here you can select the language for LyX's menus.
\r
42816 You can find its actual translation status here:
\r
42817 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
42818 LatexCommand href
\r
42819 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
\r
42826 \begin_layout Description
\r
42828 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42831 package determines which LaTeX package should be loaded to handle language
\r
42833 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
\r
42834 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
\r
42835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
42839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
42843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
42847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
42851 The most widespread language package is
\r
42856 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
42859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
42860 LaTeX-packages ! babel
\r
42865 ; it is the default language package in classic LaTeX.
\r
42866 More recent typesetting engines such as XeTeX and LuaTeX come with the
\r
42867 alternative language package
\r
42872 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
42875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
42876 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
\r
42881 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
\r
42882 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
\r
42888 The available selections are described in section
\r
42889 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
42895 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
\r
42902 \begin_layout Description
\r
42904 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42907 start If a special LaTeX-package is needed to write in a certain document
\r
42908 language, you can here specify the command to start the package.
\r
42909 An example is the start command
\r
42915 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
\r
42920 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
42921 LatexCommand cite
\r
42927 The default is the
\r
42935 selectlanguage{$$lang}
\r
42940 \begin_layout Description
\r
42942 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42945 end Counterpart to
\r
42950 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
\r
42951 command toggles the package on and off.
\r
42954 \begin_layout Description
\r
42956 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42960 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42963 Point Define the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
\r
42967 \begin_layout Description
\r
42969 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42973 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42976 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
\r
42977 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
\r
42978 used by all LaTeX-packages.
\r
42979 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
\r
42986 \begin_layout Description
\r
42988 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42991 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
\r
42993 When this option is not set, the
\r
42996 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43001 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the LaTeX-output.
\r
43002 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
\r
43005 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43010 than the default.
\r
43013 \begin_layout Description
\r
43015 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43018 end Counterpart to
\r
43021 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43027 When it is not set, the
\r
43030 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43035 is set to the end of the document.
\r
43038 \begin_layout Description
\r
43040 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43044 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43047 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
\r
43048 language will be underlined in blue.
\r
43051 \begin_layout Description
\r
43053 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43057 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43060 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
\r
43061 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
\r
43064 \begin_layout Description
\r
43066 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43069 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
\r
43070 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
\r
43071 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
\r
43072 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
\r
43075 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
43079 \begin_layout Standard
\r
43080 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
\r
43081 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43085 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
43087 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
\r
43094 \begin_layout Section
\r
43098 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
43102 \begin_layout Description
\r
43104 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43108 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43111 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
\r
43114 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
43115 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
43117 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43123 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
\r
43126 \begin_layout Description
\r
43128 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43132 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
43135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43142 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
43145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43146 Settings ! Date format
\r
43151 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
\r
43152 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
43156 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
43159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43161 http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date
\r
43167 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
43170 For example the format
\r
43171 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
43175 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
43178 prints the date as day/month/year.
\r
43181 \begin_layout Description
\r
43183 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43187 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43190 export Setting what LyX is allowed to overwrite on export.
\r
43193 \begin_layout Description
\r
43195 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43198 search Commands that will be used for the menu
\r
43200 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
43202 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43208 For a detailed description see section
\r
43210 Reverse DVI/PDF search
\r
43215 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43223 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
43225 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
43226 LatexCommand label
\r
43227 name "sub:Printer"
\r
43232 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
43235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43242 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
43245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43246 Settings ! Printer
\r
43254 \begin_layout Description
\r
43256 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43259 printer Here you can specify the name of your
\r
43264 The name will be used when the
\r
43269 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
43273 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
43276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43281 You can leave this field empty on Windows systems because it has no effect.
\r
43289 \begin_layout Description
\r
43291 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43294 command is the command LyX
\r
43295 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
43299 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
43302 LaTeX uses for printing.
\r
43310 \begin_layout Description
\r
43312 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43316 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43319 Options Here you can specify printer options.
\r
43320 A list of printer options with explanations can be found in the documentation
\r
43321 of the program that provides the
\r
43328 \begin_layout Description
\r
43330 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43334 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43338 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43341 printer This option works only for the
\r
43346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
43354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
43358 It activates a configuration file for dvips.
\r
43359 This is an option only for dvips experts.
\r
43362 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
43367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43375 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
43376 LatexCommand label
\r
43377 name "sub:LaTeX-settings"
\r
43382 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
43385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43394 \begin_layout Description
\r
43396 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43411 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43415 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43418 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
\r
43423 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
\r
43444 are used for Cyrillic.
\r
43445 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
\r
43446 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
43454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
43458 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
\r
43459 LyX sets up in the background.
\r
43460 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
\r
43463 \begin_layout Description
\r
43465 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43469 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43472 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
\r
43477 value depends on your LaTeX-system setup.
\r
43480 \begin_layout Description
\r
43482 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43486 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43490 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43494 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43497 options They only have an effect when the program
\r
43501 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
\r
43504 \begin_layout Standard
\r
43505 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
\r
43506 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
\r
43507 manuals of the applications.
\r
43510 \begin_layout Description
\r
43512 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43515 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
\r
43516 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
43522 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
\r
43529 \begin_layout Description
\r
43531 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43534 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
\r
43535 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
43541 reference "sub:Index-Program"
\r
43548 \begin_layout Description
\r
43550 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43553 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
\r
43554 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43558 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
43560 reference "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
\r
43567 \begin_layout Description
\r
43572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43580 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43583 command Command for the program
\r
43587 that is described in the section
\r
43593 Additional Features
\r
43598 \begin_layout Standard
\r
43599 There are additionally the following options:
\r
43602 \begin_layout Description
\r
43604 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43608 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43612 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43616 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43620 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43623 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
\r
43624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
43630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
43633 is used instead of
\r
43634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
43638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
43641 to separate folders.
\r
43642 This option is enabled by default when you use LyX on Windows.
\r
43643 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
43646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43653 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
43656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43665 \begin_layout Description
\r
43667 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43671 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43675 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43679 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43683 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43687 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43690 changes Removes all manually set
\r
43696 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
43697 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
43699 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43704 dialog when changing the document class.
\r
43707 \begin_layout Section
\r
43709 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43713 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
43716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43725 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
43727 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
43728 LatexCommand label
\r
43729 name "sub:Converters"
\r
43734 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
43737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43746 \begin_layout Standard
\r
43747 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
\r
43748 from one format to another.
\r
43749 You can modify converters or create new ones.
\r
43750 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
\r
43757 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43762 field and press the
\r
43767 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
\r
43771 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43776 drop-down list, modify the
\r
43780 field and press the
\r
43787 \begin_layout Standard
\r
43790 Converter File Cache
\r
43796 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
\r
43798 Maximum Age (in days
\r
43801 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
\r
43802 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
\r
43805 \begin_layout Standard
\r
43806 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
\r
43807 definition, is described in the section
\r
43818 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
43820 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
43821 LatexCommand label
\r
43822 name "sec:File-Formats"
\r
43827 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
43830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43837 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
43840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43849 \begin_layout Standard
\r
43850 Here you find the list of defined file formats that LyX can handle.
\r
43851 You can modify the
\r
43859 programs that should be used for certain formats.
\r
43862 \begin_layout Standard
\r
43863 You can also define the
\r
43865 Default output format
\r
43867 that is used when you use
\r
43869 View, Update, View Master Document
\r
43873 Update Master Document
\r
43879 menu or the toolbar.
\r
43882 \begin_layout Standard
\r
43883 More about formats and their options is described in the section
\r
43894 \begin_layout Standard
\r
43895 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in LyX's temporary
\r
43896 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
\r
43897 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
\r
43898 This is done by specifying a
\r
43903 More about this is described in the section
\r
43914 \begin_layout Chapter
\r
43915 Units available in LyX
\r
43916 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
43919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43926 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
43927 LatexCommand label
\r
43928 name "chap:Units-available-in"
\r
43935 \begin_layout Standard
\r
43937 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43941 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
43943 reference "tab:Units"
\r
43947 explains all the units available in LyX and used in this documentation.
\r
43950 \begin_layout Standard
\r
43951 \begin_inset Float table
\r
43957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43958 \begin_inset Caption Standard
\r
43960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43961 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
43962 LatexCommand label
\r
43975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43976 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
\r
43982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43984 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
43985 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="2">
\r
43986 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
43987 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0">
\r
43988 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0">
\r
43990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
43991 \begin_inset Text
\r
43993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44000 \begin_inset Text
\r
44002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44011 \begin_inset Text
\r
44013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44020 \begin_inset Text
\r
44022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44031 \begin_inset Text
\r
44033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44040 \begin_inset Text
\r
44042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44051 \begin_inset Text
\r
44053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44060 \begin_inset Text
\r
44062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44071 \begin_inset Text
\r
44073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44080 \begin_inset Text
\r
44082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44084 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
44088 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
44098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44099 \begin_inset Text
\r
44101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44108 \begin_inset Text
\r
44110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44112 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
44116 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
44126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44127 \begin_inset Text
\r
44129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44136 \begin_inset Text
\r
44138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44139 scaled point (65536
\r
44140 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
44144 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
44154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44155 \begin_inset Text
\r
44157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44164 \begin_inset Text
\r
44166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44168 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
44172 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
44182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44183 \begin_inset Text
\r
44185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44192 \begin_inset Text
\r
44194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44196 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
44200 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
\r
44204 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
44214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44215 \begin_inset Text
\r
44217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44224 \begin_inset Text
\r
44226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44228 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
44232 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
44242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44243 \begin_inset Text
\r
44245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44252 \begin_inset Text
\r
44254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44255 % of original image width
\r
44262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44263 \begin_inset Text
\r
44265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44272 \begin_inset Text
\r
44274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44283 \begin_inset Text
\r
44285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44292 \begin_inset Text
\r
44294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44295 % of column width
\r
44302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44303 \begin_inset Text
\r
44305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44312 \begin_inset Text
\r
44314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44323 \begin_inset Text
\r
44325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44332 \begin_inset Text
\r
44334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44343 \begin_inset Text
\r
44345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44352 \begin_inset Text
\r
44354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44363 \begin_inset Text
\r
44365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44372 \begin_inset Text
\r
44374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44375 % of paper height
\r
44382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44383 \begin_inset Text
\r
44385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44392 \begin_inset Text
\r
44394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44395 height of letter
\r
44406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44407 \begin_inset Text
\r
44409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44416 \begin_inset Text
\r
44418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44431 \begin_inset Text
\r
44433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44440 \begin_inset Text
\r
44442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44444 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
44448 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
44469 \begin_layout Chapter
\r
44471 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
44472 LatexCommand label
\r
44473 name "chap:Credits"
\r
44480 \begin_layout Standard
\r
44481 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
\r
44482 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
\r
44485 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
44488 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
\r
44491 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
44497 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
44503 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
44509 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
44515 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
44521 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
44527 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
44533 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
44536 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
\r
44539 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
44545 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
44551 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
44557 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
44563 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
44569 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
44575 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
44581 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
44587 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
44589 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
44590 LatexCommand cite
\r
44598 \begin_layout Standard
\r
44599 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
\r
44602 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
\r
44609 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
44610 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
44611 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
44618 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
44619 LatexCommand href
\r
44621 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
\r
44626 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
44630 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
44633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44635 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
\r
44643 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
44644 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
44645 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
44646 key "latexcompanion"
\r
44650 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
\r
44652 The LaTeX Companion Second Edition.
\r
44655 Addison-Wesley, 2004
\r
44658 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
44659 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
44660 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
44665 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
\r
44668 A Guide to LaTeX Fourth Edition.
\r
44671 Addison-Wesley, 2003
\r
44674 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
44675 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
44676 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
44683 LaTeX: A Document Preparation System.
\r
44686 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
\r
44689 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
44690 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
44691 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
44703 Addison-Wesley, 1984
\r
44706 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
44707 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
44708 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
44709 key "TeXCatalogue"
\r
44713 The TeX Catalogue:
\r
44714 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
44718 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
44721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44723 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
\r
44731 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
44732 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
44733 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
44739 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
44743 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
44746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44748 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
\r
44756 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
44757 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
44758 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
44764 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
44765 LatexCommand href
\r
44766 name "Documentation"
\r
44767 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
\r
44776 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
44780 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
44783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44785 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
\r
44793 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
44794 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
44795 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
44801 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
44802 LatexCommand href
\r
44803 name "Documentation"
\r
44804 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
\r
44808 how to use the program
\r
44813 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
44817 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
44820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44822 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
\r
44830 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
44831 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
44832 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
44838 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
44839 LatexCommand href
\r
44840 name "Documentation"
\r
44841 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
\r
44850 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
44854 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
44857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44859 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
\r
44867 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
44868 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
44869 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
44875 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
44876 LatexCommand href
\r
44877 name "Documentation"
\r
44878 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
\r
44887 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
44891 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
44894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44896 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
\r
44904 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
44905 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
44906 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
44912 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
44913 LatexCommand href
\r
44914 name "Documentation"
\r
44915 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
\r
44919 of the AMS LaTeX-packages:
\r
44920 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
44924 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
44927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44929 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
\r
44937 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
44938 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
44939 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
44945 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
44946 LatexCommand href
\r
44947 name "Documentation"
\r
44948 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
\r
44952 of the LaTeX-package
\r
44957 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
44960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44961 LaTeX-packages ! caption
\r
44967 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
44971 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
44974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44976 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
\r
44984 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
44985 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
44986 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
44992 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
44993 LatexCommand href
\r
44994 name "Documentation"
\r
44995 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
\r
44999 of the LaTeX-package
\r
45004 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
45007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45008 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
\r
45014 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45018 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45023 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
\r
45031 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45032 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45033 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45039 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45040 LatexCommand href
\r
45041 name "Documentation"
\r
45042 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
\r
45046 of the LaTeX-package
\r
45051 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
45054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45055 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
\r
45061 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45065 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45070 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
\r
45078 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45079 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45080 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45086 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45087 LatexCommand href
\r
45088 name "Documentation"
\r
45089 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
\r
45093 of the LaTeX-package
\r
45098 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
45101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45102 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
\r
45108 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45112 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45117 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
\r
45125 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45126 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45127 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45133 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45134 LatexCommand href
\r
45135 name "Documentation"
\r
45136 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
\r
45140 of the LaTeX-package
\r
45145 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
45148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45149 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
\r
45155 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45159 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45164 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
\r
45172 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45173 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45174 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45180 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45181 LatexCommand href
\r
45182 name "Documentation"
\r
45183 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
\r
45187 of the LaTeX-package
\r
45192 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
45195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45196 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
\r
45202 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45206 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45211 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
\r
45219 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45220 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45221 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45227 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45228 LatexCommand href
\r
45229 name "Documentation"
\r
45230 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
\r
45234 of the LaTeX-package
\r
45239 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
45242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45243 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
\r
45249 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45253 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45258 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
\r
45266 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45267 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45268 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45274 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45275 LatexCommand href
\r
45276 name "Documentation"
\r
45277 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/tipa/tipaman.pdf"
\r
45281 of the LaTeX-package
\r
45286 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
45289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45290 LaTeX-packages ! tipa
\r
45296 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45300 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45305 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/tipa/tipaman.pdf
\r
45313 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45314 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45315 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45321 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45322 LatexCommand href
\r
45324 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
\r
45328 how to set up LyX for Arabic:
\r
45329 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45333 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45338 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
\r
45346 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45347 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45348 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45354 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45355 LatexCommand href
\r
45357 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
\r
45361 how to set up LyX for Armenian:
\r
45362 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45366 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45371 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
\r
45379 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45380 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45381 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45387 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45388 LatexCommand href
\r
45390 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
\r
45394 how to set up LyX for Cyrillic languages:
\r
45395 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45399 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45404 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
\r
45412 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45413 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45414 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45420 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45421 LatexCommand href
\r
45423 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
\r
45427 how to set up LyX for Farsi:
\r
45428 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45432 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45437 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
\r
45445 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45446 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45447 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45453 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45454 LatexCommand href
\r
45456 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
\r
45460 how to set up LyX for Hebrew:
\r
45461 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45465 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45470 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
\r
45478 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45479 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45480 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45486 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45487 LatexCommand href
\r
45489 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
\r
45493 how to set up LyX for Japanese:
\r
45494 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45498 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45503 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
\r
45511 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45512 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45513 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45519 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45520 LatexCommand href
\r
45522 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
\r
45526 how to set up LyX for Latvian:
\r
45527 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45531 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45536 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
\r
45544 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45545 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45546 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45552 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45553 LatexCommand href
\r
45555 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
\r
45559 how to set up LyX for Lithuanian:
\r
45560 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45564 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45569 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
\r
45577 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45578 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45579 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45585 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45586 LatexCommand href
\r
45588 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
\r
45592 how to set up LyX for Mongolian:
\r
45593 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45597 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45602 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
\r
45610 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45611 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45612 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45618 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45619 LatexCommand href
\r
45621 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
\r
45625 how to set up LyX for Vietnamese:
\r
45626 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45630 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45635 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
\r
45643 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45644 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45645 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45651 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45652 LatexCommand href
\r
45654 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
\r
45658 about new features in
\r
45663 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45667 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45672 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
\r
45680 \begin_layout Standard
\r
45681 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
\r
45688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45715 \begin_inset Note Note
\r
45718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45725 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
\r
45726 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
\r
45727 bibliography is the second one:
\r
45735 \begin_layout Standard
\r
45736 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
\r
45737 LatexCommand bibtex
\r
45738 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
\r
45739 options "biblio/alphadin"
\r
45746 \begin_layout Standard
\r
45747 The above bibliography is created from a BibTeX-database.
\r
45750 \begin_layout Standard
\r
45751 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
\r
45752 LatexCommand printnomenclature
\r
45758 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
\r
45759 LatexCommand printindex
\r